JP2019155191A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine that can increase a player's attention degree to a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes a game board 31D, and the game board 31D includes a general winning port 35D provided in the game area for allowing game balls to enter and a holding device 48 for holding game ball entry to the general winning port 35D. The game machine also includes switching means for switching whether holding of the game balls by the holding device 48 can be released or not. According to this, when game balls flow down the game area and enter the general winning port 35D, the game balls are temporarily held in the holding device 48. Therefore, the game machine can diversify paths of the game balls that flow down the game area and enter the general winning port 35D, thereby increasing a player's attention degree to a game.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 42

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine including a display device that variably displays a plurality of patterns is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1). This gaming machine is provided with various winning ports such as a general winning port, an operating port, and a variable winning device provided in the gaming area, and a predetermined number of gaming balls can be obtained by entering gaming balls into the various winning ports. Paying out (prize ball). In addition, the gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when a game ball enters the operation port, and also starts displaying a variation of the pattern. For example, when the game machine wins the big hit lottery, the game machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific pictures on the display device and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

Japanese Patent Laying-Open No. 2005-074175

  However, when a game ball flows down the game area and enters various winning holes, it always enters the monotonous route, so that the player's attention to the game is reduced. There's a problem.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve a player's attention to the game.

  A gaming machine according to the present invention includes a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, a ball entry means provided in the game area for entering the game ball, and a ball entry means. A game machine comprising a payout device for paying out a prize ball when a game ball enters, a holding means for holding the game ball into the ball entering means, and a game ball holding by the hold means And switching means for switching whether or not to cancel.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to improve a player's attention to the game.

The front view of the pachinko machine concerning a 1st embodiment of the present invention. Front view of game board Enlarged view of the vicinity of the variable winning device The figure which shows the display screen of the symbol display device Block diagram showing electrical configuration of pachinko machine The figure which shows the contents of each counter used for internal lottery The figure which shows the success / failure table which memorizes the value of the random number which is elected to the big hit occurrence The figure which shows the distribution table which memorize | stored the value of the random number concerning the jackpot type distribution destination The figure which shows the flowchart of timer interruption processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the winning process for a working opening The figure which shows the flowchart of normal processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the main processing The figure which shows the flowchart of game times control processing The figure which shows the flowchart of data setting processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the fluctuation start processing The figure which shows the flowchart of a game state transfer process The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening and closing processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize mouth opening process The figure which shows the flowchart of the transfer process at the time of completion | finish of opening-and-closing execution mode The figure which shows the flowchart of an effect determination process The figure which shows the flowchart of special production processing The figure which shows the relationship between game result and game state etc. The figure which expanded the neighborhood of the variable prize-winning device concerning a 2nd embodiment of the present invention. The figure which shows the flowchart of a game state transfer process The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening and closing processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize mouth opening process The figure which shows the flowchart of an effect determination process The figure which expanded the section of the upper operation mouth concerning a 3rd embodiment of the present invention. The figure which shows the flowchart of a game state transfer process The figure which shows the flowchart of an effect determination process The figure which expanded the neighborhood of the variable prize-winning device concerning a 4th embodiment of the present invention. Block diagram showing electrical configuration of pachinko machine The figure which shows the contents of each counter used for internal lottery The figure which shows the success / failure table which memorizes the value of the random number which is elected to the big hit occurrence The figure which shows the flowchart of the fluctuation start processing The figure which shows the flowchart of a game state transfer process The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening and closing processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize mouth opening process The figure which shows the flowchart of the transfer process at the time of completion | finish of opening-and-closing execution mode The figure which shows the flowchart of an effect determination process Front view of a pachinko machine according to a fifth embodiment of the present invention. An enlarged view of the vicinity of the general winning award Block diagram showing electrical configuration of pachinko machine The figure which shows the flowchart of timer interruption processing The figure which shows the flowchart of a reservation apparatus opening / closing process The figure which shows the flowchart of the main processing The figure which shows the flowchart of normal processing The figure which shows the flowchart of a payout rate calculation process The figure which shows the flowchart of the transfer process at the time of completion | finish of opening-and-closing execution mode The figure which shows the flowchart of an effect determination process The figure which shows an example which provided the reservation device near the through gate The figure which expanded the neighborhood of the variable prize-winning device concerning a 6th embodiment of the present invention. Block diagram showing electrical configuration of pachinko machine The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize opening and closing processing The figure which shows the flowchart of the big prize mouth opening process The figure which shows the flowchart of an effect determination process

[First Embodiment]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention.
The pachinko machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine that is a kind of gaming machine. As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 11 forward (front side). 12.

  The gaming machine main body 12 is disposed in front of the inner frame (not shown) supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be rotatable with one of the left and right side portions being the support side, and both the left and right sides. The front door frame 13 is supported by the inner frame so that it can be rotated forward with one of the support sides as a support side, and the rear side with one of the left and right sides as the support side. And a back pack unit (not shown) supported by the inner frame so as to be rotatable.

  Note that the gaming machine main body 12 includes a locking device (not shown) provided at the rotating tip. This locking device has a function of setting the gaming machine body 12 to a locked state that cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11, and a function of setting the front door frame 13 to a locked state that cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame. Have. These locked states are released by performing an unlocking operation on the cylinder lock 14 provided exposed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 using an unlocking key.

The front door frame 13 includes a substantially elliptical window portion 21 provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame, and a window panel 22 fitted in the window portion 21. In the present embodiment, the window panel 22 is formed of colorless and transparent with glass, but may be formed of colorless and transparent with synthetic resin or the like.
The front door frame 13 includes a display lamp portion 23 provided above the window portion 21 as a part of the light emitting means including various lamp portions and the like provided around the window portion 21, and a display lamp portion. 23, a speaker unit 24 that outputs sound effects according to the gaming situation, and an upper bulging unit 25 and a lower bulging unit 26 provided below the window unit 21. Yes.

The upper bulging portion 25 and the lower bulging portion 26 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction, and are both provided to bulge forward.
The upper bulging portion 25 has an upper plate 25a provided inside so as to open upward. The upper plate 25a temporarily stores the game balls paid out by the payout device 71 (see FIG. 5) provided in the back pack unit, and aligns them in a line while playing the game ball launching mechanism 81 (see FIG. 5). It has a function to lead to
The lower bulging portion 26 has a lower plate 26a provided on the inner side so as to open upward. The lower tray 26a has a function of storing game balls that become surplus in the upper tray 25a.

  Further, the front door frame 13 includes a firing handle 27 as a firing means provided on the right side of the lower plate 26a. The launch handle 27 is operated by a player of the pachinko machine 10 to launch a game ball from a game ball launch mechanism 81 provided below the inner frame toward a game area provided above the inner frame. To do. The launch handle 27 changes the launch intensity of the game ball that is launched toward the game area, that is, the launch momentum, by changing the amount of rotation operation.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board.
As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 31 has an inner rail portion 32 and an outer rail portion 33 attached to the surface thereof, and is mounted on an inner frame. The game area described above is formed on the game board 31 so as to be partitioned by the inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33. This gaming area can be visually recognized from the front through the window portion 21.
The inner rail portion 32 and the outer rail portion 33 constitute a guide ball 34 for a game ball to the game area. The played game ball is guided to the upper part of the game area.

  The guide rail 34 is formed so that the exit portion thereof is disposed on one side of the gaming area and faces the upper center of the gaming area. For this reason, the reaching position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area is increased from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side as the amount of rotation of the launch handle 27 by the player increases. Shift to the side. In the present embodiment, the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is provided on the left side of the game area.

  The game board 31 has a plurality of large and small openings formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. In addition, the game board 31 includes a general winning port 35, an upper operating port (first starting pitching portion) 36, a lower operating port (second starting pitching portion) 37, a variable winning device 38 provided in each opening, And a first out port 39a. In addition, the game board 31 includes a through gate 41 provided on each of the central portion left side and the central portion right side, a main display device 42 provided on the upper right side, a variable display unit 43 provided on the central portion, and the like. Have. Further, the game board 31 has a large number of nails 44 and various members (acts) such as a windmill in the game area so as to disperse or adjust the falling direction of the game balls as appropriate. ing.

  Each of the general winning port 35, the upper operating port 36, the lower operating port 37, and the various winning ports of the variable winning device 38 includes detection sensors 50a to 50d (see FIG. 5) for detecting the entering of game balls. The detection sensors 50 a to 50 d are arranged on the back side of the game board 31. Specifically, the general winning opening 35 includes a detection sensor 50a, the upper operation opening 36 includes a detection sensor 50b, the lower operation opening 37 includes a detection sensor 50c, and the variable winning apparatus 38 includes a detection sensor 50d. It has. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection results of the detection sensors 50a to 50d. The detection sensors 50a to 50d may be any sensors as long as they can individually detect a winning game ball. For example, an electromagnetic induction proximity sensor may be employed.

  Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 pays out 10 prize balls when a ball enters the general prize opening 35. The pachinko machine 10 pays out three prize balls when a ball enters the upper working port 36 and when a ball enters the lower working port 37. The pachinko machine 10 pays out 15 award balls when a winning ball enters the variable winning device 38. Note that the number of these prize balls is arbitrary. For example, the number of prize balls in each of the operation ports 36 and 37 may be different.

  The first out port 39 a is provided at the lowermost part of the game area of the game board 31. The game balls that have not entered the various winning holes etc. are discharged from the game area through the first out port 39a. The first out port 39a includes a detection sensor 50e that detects the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensor 50e is disposed on the back side of the game board 31. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not perform the payout of the winning ball when the ball enters the first out port 39a, unlike when the ball enters the various winning ports.

  Each through gate 41 includes a detection sensor 50 f that detects entry of a game ball, and the detection sensor 50 f is disposed on the back side of the game board 31. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 does not perform the payout of the prize balls when the entrance to each through gate 41 occurs, unlike the case where the entrance to various winning entrances occurs.

  Here, the term “entering ball” means that a game ball passes through a predetermined opening, and is not only a mode in which the game ball is discharged from the game area after passing through the opening, but is also discharged from the game area after passing through the opening. It also includes a mode in which the game area continues to flow down. However, in the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the first out port 39a, the game ball entering the various winning ports is also expressed as winning. In addition, entering the through gate 41 means that the game area continues to flow down without being discharged from the game area after passing through the gate provided in the game area. The entry to the through gate 41 is also expressed as a win, as is the case of entering the various winning openings.

  The upper operating port 36 and the lower operating port 37 are unitized as an operating port device and installed in the game board 31. Each of the operation ports 36 and 37 opens upward so that a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and the upper operation port 36 is disposed upward and the lower operation port 37 is disposed downward. Are arranged side by side in the vertical direction. The lower working port 37 has an electric accessory 37a as a guide piece (support piece) constituted by a pair of left and right movable pieces.

  The electric combination 37a is connected to an electric combination driving unit 37b mounted on the back side of the game board 31. The electric accessory 37a is set to either a closed state (non-support state or non-guide state) or an open state (support state or guide state) by being driven by the electric agent drive unit 37b. The closed state is a state in which the lower working port 37 is closed by bringing the upper end of the electric accessory 37a closer in the left-right direction. The open state is a state in which the lower working port 37 is opened by separating the upper end of the electric accessory 37a in the left-right direction.

  Here, when the electric accessory 37a is set in a closed state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the bottom surface portion of the upper working port 36 is narrower than that of one game ball. Further, when the electric accessory 37a is set in the open state, the distance between the upper end of the electric accessory 37a and the bottom surface of the upper working port 36 is wider than that of one game ball. Therefore, the game ball cannot win the lower working port 37 when the electric accessory 37a is set to the closed state, and can win the lower working port 37 when the opened game is set. it can.

  In addition, the electric accessory 37a has a state in which it is difficult for a game ball to win a prize in the lower operating port 37 (a state in which a game ball can enter unlike the closed state) instead of the closed state and the open state described above, It is good also as a structure which switches the state in which a game ball is easy to win a prize to the action port 37. Further, the lower working port 37 may be configured not to perform such switching by setting of the electric accessory 37a but to be performed by displacement of the lower working port 37. 37 does not need to include the electric accessory 37a.

FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the variable winning device.
As shown in FIG. 3, the gaming board 31 includes the above-described variable winning device 38 provided on the lower right side of the gaming area, a second out port 39b provided on the right side of the variable winning device 38, and a variable winning device. And a game ball holding mechanism 40 provided between the H.38 and the second out port 39b.

  Here, the game board 31 includes a variable winning device 38, a second out port 39b, and a cover 381 (see FIG. 2) provided so as to cover the front side of the game ball holding mechanism 40. The cover 381 is provided around the transparent panel 381a and a transparent panel 381a formed transparent (or translucent) so that the variable winning device 38 and the game ball holding mechanism 40 are visible from the front side. An opaque panel 381b is provided so as to make the second out port 39b invisible from the front side.

Therefore, the player can visually recognize the variable winning device 38 and the game ball holding mechanism 40 from the front through the transparent panel 381a and the window portion 21. Further, the player cannot visually recognize the second out port 39b from the front.
FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the variable winning device 38 with the cover 381 removed for the sake of explanation.

The variable winning device 38 drives a large winning opening 38a that opens upward so that a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, an open / close door 38b for opening / closing the large winning opening 38a, and the open / close door 38b. And a variable winning drive unit 38c.
Note that the player maximizes the amount of rotation of the launch handle 27, and changes the arrival position of the game ball in the upper part of the game area from the side of the side where the exit portion of the guide rail 34 is formed to the opposite side. By shifting to the side, the game ball can be guided to the variable winning device 38 while avoiding the variable display unit 43 and the like.

  The special winning opening 38a is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. As described above, the special winning opening 38a includes the detection sensor 50d that detects the entry of a game ball. The pachinko machine 10 pays out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the detection result.

The open / close door 38b is formed in a rectangular plate shape, and is provided on the game board 31 so as to close the opening of the special winning opening 38a. The open / close door 38b moves forward toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31, thereby closing the opening of the special winning opening 38a and retreating toward the inside of the game board 31. By burying in 31, there is an open state in which the opening of the special winning opening 38 a is opened.
The variable winning drive unit 38c drives the open / close door 38b to set the open / close door 38b to either the open state or the closed state.

Specifically, the open / close door 38b is normally set in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won. Then, in the internal lottery, when the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is won and the transition to the opening / closing execution mode is made, the opening / closing door 38b is set to an open state in which a game ball can be won.
The open / close execution mode (specific control state) refers to a mode in which the open / close door 38b is set to an open state and a game ball can be inserted into the special winning opening 38a. In addition, in the opening / closing execution mode, the period from when the opening / closing door 38b is set to the open state until it is set to the closed state again is referred to as one round game.

  The second out port 39b is provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing, and has the same function as the first out port 39a. Specifically, the second out port 39b includes a detection sensor 50g that detects the entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 50g is disposed on the back side of the game board 31. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not pay out a prize ball when a ball enters the second out port 39b as in the case where a ball enters the first out port 39a.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the special winning opening 38a is a ball entry means provided in the game area for entering the game ball, and the game ball has an advantageous result that it can receive the payout of the prize ball. It functions as an advantageous side entry means to be given to the player when entering the ball.
In addition, the second out port 39b is a ball entry means provided in the game area for entering the game ball, and has a disadvantageous result that the payout of the prize ball cannot be received (at the big prize port 38a). It functions as a disadvantageous side entry means that gives the player a result that is more disadvantageous than the advantageous result that is given).

Of the large number of nails 44 planted in the vicinity of the variable winning device 38, the nail 44a provided above the large winning port 38a and the second out port 39b holds the game ball in the large winning port 38a and the second winning port 38a. It functions as a sorting means for sorting and entering any of the out ports 39b.
Specifically, the game ball that has passed the left side of the nail 44a falls toward the prize winning port 38a, and the game ball that has passed the right side of the nail 44a falls toward the second out port 39b. become. Therefore, by setting the nail 44a so that the game ball falling toward the nail 44a can easily pass through the left side of the nail 44a, the nail 44a distributes the game ball to the big prize opening 38a and enters the ball. , And the rate at which game balls are distributed to the second out-ports 39b and entered can be reduced (first state). Further, by setting the nail 44a so that the game ball falling toward the nail 44a can easily pass through the right side of the nail 44a, the nail 44a distributes the game ball to the second out port 39b and enters the ball. While increasing the ratio, it is possible to reduce the ratio of distributing the game balls to the big winning opening 38a and entering them (second state).
In other words, the nail 44a is configured to switch between the first state and the second state, thereby distributing the game balls to the big winning opening 38a and entering the game balls into the second out port. It is configured to be able to set the proportion of the balls to be distributed to 39b.

  In the present embodiment, the distributing means distributes the game balls to the big winning opening 38a by one nail 44a and assigns the game balls to the second out port 39b to enter the balls. It was configured to be set at the same time. On the other hand, the allocating means separately divides the proportion of the game balls into the advantageous side entry means by a plurality of elements and the proportion of the game balls into the disadvantage side entry means and enters the balls separately. It may be configured to be settable. Specifically, for example, the distribution means uses two nails instead of the nail 44a to distribute the game balls to the big winning opening 38a and to enter the game balls into the second out port. You may comprise so that it can set separately the ratio which distributes to 39b and enters a ball. According to this, by setting one of the nails, it is possible to set a ratio of distributing the game balls to the big winning opening 38a and entering the ball, and by setting the other nail, the game balls are second out. It is possible to set the ratio of the balls 39b to be distributed and entered.

The game ball holding mechanism 40 is provided below the holding unit 401 for holding the game ball and the information providing unit for giving information to the player using the game ball held by the holding unit 401. Part 402.
The holding unit 401 has an entrance formed upward to allow the game balls distributed to the second out port 39b by the nail 44a to enter, and the game ball entered from the entrance falls toward the information providing unit 402 And a passage having an outlet formed downward to enter the ball, and this passage is provided between the big winning opening 38a and the second out opening 39b. The holding portion 401 includes an upper plate 401a as a first plate provided adjacent to the open / close door 38b, a lower plate 401b as a second plate provided below the upper plate 401a, and an upper plate 401a. And a plate driver 401c for driving the lower plate 401b.

  The upper plate 401 a is provided on the game board 31 so as to close the entrance of the holding portion 401. Further, the upper plate 401a is provided to be inclined so as to descend from the side of the special winning opening 38a toward the second out opening 39b. The upper plate 401 a moves forward toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31, thereby closing the entrance of the holding portion 401 and retreating toward the inside of the game board 31. It has an open state in which the entrance of the holding portion 401 is opened by being buried in.

The lower plate 401 b is provided on the game board 31 so as to close the outlet of the holding portion 401. The lower plate 401 b moves forward toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31, thereby closing the outlet of the holding unit 401 and retreating toward the inside of the game board 31. It has the open state which open | releases the exit of the holding | maintenance part 401 by being buried in.
The plate drive unit 401c drives the upper plate 401a and the lower plate 401b to set each of the plates 401a and 401b to either the open state or the closed state.

Here, when the plates 401 a and 401 b are both set in a closed state, a holding space defined by the game board 31 and the plates 401 a and 401 b can be formed in the passage of the holding unit 401. The holding space has a size capable of holding one game ball.
Therefore, the holding unit 401 can cause the game ball that has passed through the right side of the nail 44a to enter the holding space by setting the upper plate 401a to the open state and the lower plate 401b to the closed state. The holding unit 401 includes a detection sensor 50 h that detects the entry of a game ball, and the detection sensor 50 h is disposed on the back side of the game board 31.

  In addition, the holding unit 401 sets the upper plate 401a in a closed state after one gaming ball is inserted into the holding space, that is, after the detection sensor 50h detects the entering of the gaming ball into the holding space. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down toward the holding unit 401 from entering the holding space. Here, the game ball that has passed the right side of the nail 44a flows down toward the holding portion 401, and then enters the second out port 39b along the upper surface of the upper plate 401a using the inclination of the upper plate 401a. . That is, the holding unit 401 can cause the game ball to enter the holding space when the game ball is distributed to the second out port 39b by the nail 44a. Further, when the upper plate 401a is set to the closed state and then the lower plate 401b is set to the open state, the holding unit 401 can drop the game ball held in the holding space and enter the information providing unit 402. .

  In the present embodiment, the holding unit 401 includes an upper plate 401a and a lower plate 401b, and the game ball that has passed through the right side of the nail 44a flows down toward the holding unit 401, and then tilts the upper plate 401a. Was used to enter the second out port 39b along the upper surface of the upper plate 401a. On the other hand, the holding | maintenance part 401 does not need to be provided with the upper plate 401a. In this case, after the game ball that has passed through the right side of the nail 44a flows down toward the holding portion 401, the game ball enters the second out port 39b through the upper part of the game ball that has entered the holding space. What is necessary is just to adjust the space | interval of the inlet_port | entrance of the holding | maintenance part 401, and the lower plate 401b.

  The information providing unit 402 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped information providing space, and is opened upward so that the game ball held by the holding unit 401 can be entered. The information providing unit 402 is provided on the left side of the information providing space, and has a protruding piece 402a protruding toward the right side in the horizontal direction, an upper entrance 402b provided above the protruding piece 402a, and the protruding piece 402a. A lower entrance ball opening 402c provided below and a guide member that is provided adjacent to the projecting piece 402a and guides a game ball that has entered the information giving unit 402 to the upper entrance ball entrance 402b or the lower entrance ball entrance 402c. 402d and a guide member drive unit 402e that drives the guide member 402d.

  The upper entrance 402b and the lower entrance 402c are provided in an opening formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by performing router processing. The upper entrance 402b includes a detection sensor 50i that detects entry of a game ball, and the lower entrance 402c includes a detection sensor 50j that detects entry of a game ball. These detection sensors 50 i and 50 j are arranged on the back side of the game board 31. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is similar to the case where a ball enters the first and second outlets 39a and 39b when a ball enters the upper ball inlet 402b or the lower ball inlet 402c. In addition, the award ball payout may not be executed, but the award ball payout may be executed.

The guide member 402d is provided at a substantially central position of the information providing space so that the left end can be rotated in the vertical direction (the direction of a double arrow in the figure) with the right end as the center. This guide member 402d brings the left end close to the protruding piece 402a, thereby bringing the game ball into the upper entrance state 402b (solid line position in the figure) and bringing the left end close to the bottom surface of the information providing space. Thus, it has a lower entry state (a two-dot chain line position in the figure) for guiding the game ball to the lower entry port 402c. The guide member 402d is provided to be inclined so as to descend toward the respective entrances 402b and 402c regardless of whether the guide member 402d is set in either the upper entrance state or the lower entrance state. Accordingly, the game ball enters the entrance holes 402b and 402c through the guide member 402d using the inclination of the guide member 402d.
The guide member driving unit 402e drives the guide member 402d to set the guide member 402d to either the upper entrance ball state or the lower entrance ball state.

As shown in FIG. 2, the main display device 42 includes a main display unit 45 and an accessory display unit 46, and a segment display or dot display in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. A plurality of display devices such as these are arranged.
The main display device 42 is provided on the game board 31 so as to bulge toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. That is, the main display device 42 is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the window panel 22. Further, the distance between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22 is narrower than that of one game ball. Thus, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from falling between the main display device 42 and the window panel 22. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from dropping in front of the main display device 42.

  The main display unit 45 includes a first result display unit 45 a for displaying the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper working port 36, and the internal performed based on the winning to the lower working port 37. And a second result display unit 45b for displaying the lottery result (see FIG. 5). The main display unit 45 may further include a round display unit for clearly indicating the number of round games in the opening / closing execution mode when the opening / closing execution mode is entered (or when the opening / closing execution mode is entered). .

The first result display unit 45a executes a variable display of a picture triggered by a winning at the upper working port 36, and an internal lottery performed based on the winning at the upper working port 36 as a stop result of the changing display. Display the result of. When the result of the internal lottery is a result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the first result display unit 45a displays a predetermined stop result. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.
The second result display unit 45b executes the display of the variation of the pattern triggered by the winning of the lower working port 37, and the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower working port 37 as a result of stopping the variation display. Display the result of. When the result of the internal lottery is a result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the second result display unit 45b displays a predetermined stop result. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  The accessory display unit 46 displays the variation of the picture triggered by the winning of each through gate 41, and the internal lottery performed based on the winning of each through gate 41 as a result of stopping the variation display. Display the result of. When the result of the internal lottery is a result corresponding to the transition to the electric role open state, the accessory display unit 46 displays a predetermined stop result. Thereafter, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the electric power open state. In this electric combination open state, the electric combination 37a provided in the lower working port 37 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  In the present embodiment, the main display unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46 are configured by segment displays. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, You may be comprised by other types of display apparatuses, such as a dot matrix. In addition, as a pattern to be variably displayed on the main display unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed, and a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are variably displayed. Alternatively, a configuration in which a plurality of types of colors are switched and displayed can be employed.

  The variable display unit 43 includes a symbol display device 51 that performs variable display (variable display or switching display) of a symbol that is a kind of pattern. The variable display unit 43 includes a center frame 52 disposed so as to surround the symbol display device 51. The upper portion of the center frame 52 is provided so as to bulge out toward the window panel 22 provided on the front side thereof. Thereby, the pachinko machine 10 prevents the game ball from dropping in front of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and does not cause the inconvenience that the visibility of the display screen G decreases due to the fall of the game ball. It has a configuration.

The symbol display device 51 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display. The symbol display device 51 starts symbol variation display based on winning in the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37. That is, when the symbol display device 51 executes variable display on the first result display unit 45a of the main display unit 45 and executes variable display on the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, The variable display is executed accordingly.
The symbol display device 51 is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and may be a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or another display device such as a CRT.

The center frame 52 includes a first holding lamp unit 53 provided in a lower left region of the symbol display device 51, a second holding lamp unit 54 provided in a lower right region of the symbol display device 51, and a symbol display. And a third holding lamp portion 55 provided in the upper region of the device 51.
The first hold lamp unit 53 is a part that displays the number of game balls held in the upper operation port 36 and lights up according to the number of holds. The first hold lamp unit 53 can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the first result display unit 45a and the symbol display device 51.
The second holding lamp unit 54 is a part that displays the number of game balls held in the lower operating port 37 and lights up according to the number of held balls. The second hold lamp unit 54 can hold up to four game balls, and corresponds to the variable display of the second result display unit 45 b and the symbol display device 51.

The third hold lamp portion 55 is a part for displaying the number of game balls held in each through gate 41 and lights up according to the number of holds. The third hold lamp unit 55 can hold up to four game balls and corresponds to the variable display of the accessory display unit 46.
Each of the holding lamp units 53 to 55 may have other configurations such as being displayed as an image on a part of the symbol display device 51 described later.

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a display screen of the symbol display device.
As shown in FIG. 4, the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 is divided into three columns of display areas. Each display area includes a left symbol column Z1, a middle symbol column Z2, and a right symbol in order from the left. Column Z3 is displayed. In each symbol row Z1 to Z3, eight types of symbols “1” to “8” are arranged in ascending order from the bottom to the top, and “8” is followed by “1”. Configured. In FIG. 4, the center line of each display area is indicated by a one-dot chain line.

The symbol display device 51 periodically scrolls the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction (upward in the present embodiment) based on winning in the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37. By starting the variable display of symbols, an effect for game times is executed on the display screen G. The effect for the game times is changed from the variable display to the stop display in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and finally, the predetermined symbol is stopped and displayed on the active line L. Exit with state.
In other words, the game times refers to a period from when the variable display is started on the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 51 to displaying a predetermined stop result on the basis of winning at each of the operation ports 36 and 37.

  In addition, the mode of the variable display of the symbol in the symbol display device 51 is not limited to this and is arbitrary. For example, the number of symbol rows, the scroll direction of each symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like can be changed as appropriate. Further, the symbols of each symbol row may be a mode in which a picture and a number are combined instead of a mode having only a number, or a mode having only a picture.

<Electric configuration of pachinko machine 10>
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
As shown in FIG. 5, the pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 60, a sound emission control device 90, and a display control device 100, and these devices are mounted on the back side of the inner frame. The pachinko machine 10 also includes a payout control device 70 for executing payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out the game ball, and a power source for executing launch control for causing the game ball launching mechanism 81 to fire the game ball. And a launch control device 80, which are mounted on the backpack unit.

  The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control (main control) of the game, and a power failure monitoring board 65 that monitors the power supply. The main control device 60 includes a board box that houses the main control board 61 and the like. This substrate box may be provided with a trace means that leaves a trace when opened, or may have a trace structure that leaves a trace when opened. Specifically, as the trace means, a substrate box is configured by combining a plurality of case bodies, and a connection portion (caulking portion) that requires destruction of a predetermined part when separating each case body is provided, or peeling is performed. At this time, a configuration in which a seal seal that leaves a trace of being peeled off due to the adhesive layer remaining on the adhesion target can be applied so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of case bodies. Moreover, as a trace structure, the structure etc. which apply | coat an adhesive agent with respect to the boundary between these case bodies can be employ | adopted.

The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 that stores various control programs and fixed value data, and a RAM 64 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 63 is executed. In addition to the ROM 63 and the RAM 64, the MPU 62 includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, a counter circuit as a random number generator, and the like.
In this embodiment, the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 are formed as one chip with respect to the MPU 62, but may be configured as separate chips. The same applies to the MPUs of control devices other than the main control device 60.

  The MPU 62 includes an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65 provided in the main controller 60 and the plurality of detection sensors 50a to 50g. The output port of the MPU 62 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 65, the payout control device 70, and the sound emission control device 90. The output port of the MPU 62 includes an electric combination driving unit 37b that opens and closes the electric combination 37a of the lower working port 37, a variable winning drive unit 38c that opens and closes the opening and closing door 38b of the variable winning device 38, and a main display. The unit 45 and the accessory display unit 46 are connected.

  The main control board 61 has a driver circuit. The MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through this driver circuit. Specifically, in the state where the electric combination is released, the MPU 62 performs drive control of the electric combination driving unit 37b to open and close the electric combination 37a. In the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c to open / close the special winning opening 38a. In each game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display unit 45 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on winning in each of the operation ports 36 and 37. Further, the MPU 62 performs display control of the accessory display unit 46 and displays the result of the internal lottery performed based on winning in each through gate 41.

The power failure monitoring board 65 relays the main control board 61 and the power source / launch control device 80 having a function of supplying operating power, and monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts output from the power source / launch control device 80. . Therefore, the MPU 62 receives power through the power failure monitoring board 65.
The detection sensors 50a to 50g include various winning ports of the general winning port 35, the upper operating port 36, the lower operating port 37, and the variable winning device 38, the first out port 39a and the second out port 39b, and the through gates 41. Are provided in a one-to-one correspondence. Based on the detection results of the detection sensors 50a to 50g, the MPU 62 performs winning determinations (entry determination) for various winning ports, the first out port 39a and the second out port 39b, and each through gate 41. . The MPU 62 executes an internal lottery based on the winning determination for the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37.

  Based on a command (control command) transmitted from the main control device 60, the payout control device 70 executes payout control that causes the payout device 71 to pay out a prize ball or a rental ball (a game ball lent to a player during a game). To do.

  The power / launch control device 80 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Then, the power source / launch control device 80 generates necessary operating power for the main control board 61, the payout control device 70, etc. based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, and the generated operation Supply power. The power supply / launch control device 80 includes a power supply unit for power interruption such as a backup capacitor. The power supply unit for power interruption supplies power for storage retention to the RAM 64 of the main controller 60 even when power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted.

  In addition, the power source / launch control device 80 executes launch control for causing the game ball launch mechanism 81 to launch a game ball. Here, the game ball launching mechanism 81 includes a launch rail that extends toward the guide rail 34 of the game board 31, a ball feeder that feeds the game balls stored in the upper plate 25a onto the launch rail, And a solenoid that is an electric actuator for firing the game ball supplied to the guide rail 34. The power supply / firing control device 80 supplies a driving signal (firing permission signal) to the solenoid to fire a game ball when predetermined firing conditions are satisfied.

  The sound emission control device 90 includes a sound emission control board 91. The sound emission control board 91 includes an MPU 92. The MPU 92 includes a ROM 93 that stores various control programs and fixed value data, and a RAM 94 that is a memory for temporarily storing various data when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. In addition to the ROM 93 and the RAM 94, the MPU 92 includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like.

  The MPU 92 includes an input port and an output port. The input port of the MPU 92 is connected to a plurality of detection sensors 50h to 50j. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to the various lamp units 23, 53 to 55, the speaker unit 24, and the display control device 100. The output port of the MPU 92 is connected to a plate driving unit 401c that drives the upper plate 401a and the lower plate 401b, and a guide member driving unit 402e that drives the guide member 402d.

Based on the command transmitted from the main controller 60, the MPU 92 performs drive control of the various lamp units 23, 53 to 55, the speaker unit 24, the upper plate 401a and the lower plate 401b, and the guide member 402d.
The detection sensors 50h to 50j are provided in a one-to-one correspondence with the holding unit 401, the upper entrance 402b, and the lower entrance 402c. Based on the detection results of the detection sensors 50h to 50j, the MPU 92 performs winning determination (entrance determination) to the holding unit 401, the upper entrance 402b, and the lower entrance 402c.
In addition, the MPU 92 transmits a command obtained as a result of analyzing these commands to the display control apparatus 100. The sound emission control device 90 is electrically connected to the display control device 100 via a connector unit (connection unit) in which connectors are provided at both ends of the signal line.

  The display control apparatus 100 includes a display control board 101. The display control board 101 includes an MPU 102 that is an element obtained by compounding a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107.

The MPU 102 analyzes a command transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 and performs a predetermined calculation process based on this command to control the VDP 105. Specifically, the MPU 102 executes control of the VDP 105 by generating a command for the VDP 105.
The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data. The program ROM 103 is a non-volatile storage means that does not require an external power supply for holding stored information.
The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the control program is executed. The work RAM 104 is a volatile storage unit that requires an external power supply to hold stored information.

  The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver installed in the symbol display device 51. Since the VDP 105 is an IC chip, it is also referred to as a “drawing chip”, and the entity should be said to be a microcomputer chip that incorporates firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the timing of each of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107, etc. to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 and displays it on the symbol display device 51.

The character ROM 106 functions as an image data library for storing character data such as symbols displayed on the symbol display device 51. The character ROM 106 holds bitmap format image data of various designs, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.
The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 51, and the display contents of the symbol display device 51 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107.

<Electrical configuration for executing internal lottery in MPU 62 of main controller 60>
FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used for the internal lottery.
As shown in FIG. 6, the MPU 62 executes an internal lottery by using the values (information) of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4. Specifically, the MPU 62 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 for the jackpot occurrence lottery, and uses the jackpot type counter C2 for the jackpot type lottery to determine whether to generate a reach display when the jackpot occurs. The reach random number counter C3 is used. Further, the MPU 62 uses the random number initial value counter CINI for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and uses the variation type counter CS for determining the display duration in the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 51. Further, the MPU 62 uses the electric accessory release counter C4 for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 37a of the lower working port 37 is in the electric utility open state. The counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 are provided in various counter areas 64a (see FIG. 5) of the RAM 64.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. Among the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are stored in the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37. Are stored in a reserved ball storage area 64b (see FIG. 5) provided as an acquisition information storage means. Of the values stored in the lottery counter buffer, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 is stored in the electric role reservation area 64c (see FIG. 5) of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins each through gate 41. Is done.

  The reserved ball storage area 64b includes a first result display area reservation area Ra, a second result display area reservation area Rb, and an execution area AE.

  The first result display area reservation area Ra provided as the first acquisition information storage means includes four storage areas, a first area Ra1 to a fourth area Ra4. Each area Ra1 to Ra4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 sets each of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 as holding information in time series in each area Ra1 to Ra4 according to the winning of the game ball to the upper operating port 36. Store it. Specifically, the MPU 62 displays the hold information in the order of the first area Ra1, the second area Ra2, the third area Ra3, and the fourth area Ra4 when the winning to the upper working port 36 is continuously generated a plurality of times. Store in time series.

As described above, the first result display area holding area Ra includes four storage areas, and therefore, up to four winnings of game balls to the upper operation port 36 are reserved. The first result display area reservation area Ra includes a storage area for writing the number of reservations stored in the areas Ra1 to Ra4.
Note that the number of reserves related to the upper operation port 36 is not limited to four, but may be arbitrary, and may be other plural numbers such as two, three, or five or more. May be.

  The second result display area reservation area Rb provided as the second acquisition information storage means includes four storage areas, a first area Rb1 to a fourth area Rb4. Each area Rb1 to Rb4 is set to a storage capacity capable of storing a set of values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3. The MPU 62 sets each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 as holding information in time series in each area Rb1 to Rb4 in accordance with the winning of the game ball to the lower operation port 37. Store it. Specifically, the MPU 62 displays the hold information in the order of the first area Rb1 → the second area Rb2 → the third area Rb3 → the fourth area Rb4 when the winning to the lower operating port 37 occurs continuously a plurality of times. Store in time series.

As described above, the second result display section holding area Rb includes four storage areas, and therefore, up to four winnings of game balls to the lower operation port 37 are held. Further, the second result display area reservation area Rb includes a storage area for writing the number of reservations stored in each of the areas Rb1 to Rb4.
Note that the number of reserves related to the lower operation port 37 is not limited to four, but may be arbitrary, and may be other plural numbers such as two, three, or five or more. May be.

  The execution area AE stores the hold information stored in the storage area of the first result display section reservation area Ra or the second result display section reservation area Rb when starting the variable display of the result display sections 45a and 45b. It is an area for moving.

Similarly to the first result display area reservation area Ra and the second result display area reservation area Rb, the electric role reservation area 64c includes four storage areas. Therefore, a maximum of four game balls won in each through gate 41 are put on hold.
Note that the number of reserved gates related to each through gate 41 is not limited to four, but is arbitrary, and may be other plural numbers such as two, three, or five or more. May be.

<Detailed description of each counter>
Details of each counter will be described below.
First, the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 250 by adding 1 to the previous value every time it is updated, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value 250. ing.
The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the electric utility reservation area 64c of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins each through gate 41. The
Then, the MPU 62 draws a lottery (whether or not the electric combination is set to the electric combination open state of the electric combination 37a of the lower working port 37 based on the value of the electric combination release counter C4 stored in the electric combination holding area 64c. Execute a product open lottery).

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of support modes with different frequencies at which the game balls can be awarded to the lower operation port 37 by setting the electric accessory 37a to the open state. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has a low-frequency support mode (low-frequency guide state) in which the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a in the open state is relatively low, and the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a in the open state. It has a relatively high high frequency support mode (high frequency guide state).

  In the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the power combination open state is the same (for example, both 4/5) in the power combination release lottery. However, in the high frequency support mode, when the electrification opening state is won, the number of times that the electric combination 37a is set to the open state is larger than the low frequency support mode, and the electric combination 37a is set to the open state. The opening time for one time is also longer. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the closing time for setting the electrically-powered article 37a in the closed state during each opening in the one electric power opening state is shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, compared to the low frequency support mode, the high frequency support mode is a minimum reserved time (a role that is secured as a waiting time from the completion of the electric utility product opening lottery to the next electric utility product opening lottery. The duration of one variation display in the object display unit 46 is shortened.

Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the game ball is likely to win the lower operation port 37 in comparison with the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that the game ball will win the upper operation port 36 than the lower operation port 37. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball wins the lower operation port 37 is higher than the upper operation port 36.
When a winning to the lower operating port 37 is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the game balls so much. It can be carried out.

  The configurations of the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode are not limited to this. For example, the high frequency support mode may be configured to increase the probability of winning the power combination open state in the electric component release lottery as compared to the low frequency support mode. In addition, for example, a plurality of types of reserved time may be prepared, and the high frequency support mode may be configured to easily select a short reserved time as compared with the low frequency support mode. May be configured to be shorter. Further, by combining the conditions of the number of times that the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the open time, and the securing time, the high frequency support mode is used to set the frequency of setting the electric accessory 37a to the low frequency support mode. You may comprise so that it may be relatively high compared with.

  Next, the jackpot random number counter C1 will be described. The jackpot random number counter C1 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within a range of 0 to 599 by adding 1 to the previous value every time it is updated, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value 599. . The jackpot random number counter C1 reads the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time as an initial value every loop. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter that loops within a range of 0 to 599, like the jackpot random number counter C1.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37. Stored in Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 36, and the game ball wins the lower operation port 37 It is stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery for generating a jackpot (win / no lottery) based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a success / failure table in which random number values won for winning a jackpot are stored.
Among the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the random number value that is won for the jackpot occurrence is, as shown in FIG. It is stored as (Attack Information Group).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has two success / failure lottery modes of a low probability mode (low probability state) that is difficult to win a jackpot occurrence and a high probability mode (high probability state) that is easy to win a jackpot occurrence. . Further, the success / failure table includes a low probability mode success / failure table (low probability success / failure information group) shown in FIG. 7A and a high probability mode success / failure table (high probability success / failure information shown in FIG. 7B). Group).
The MPU 62 compares the success / failure table with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b to execute a lottery for generating the jackpot.

These success / failure tables have a plurality of lottery lottery results (win / failure results) of “big hit win”, “special loss result”, and “normal loss result”.
Specifically, under the gaming state in which a winning table for low probability mode is referred to when a lottery occurs, as shown in FIG. 7 (a), there are two random number values for “hit winning”. It is.
On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for high probability mode is referred to in the lottery in which the jackpot is generated, as shown in FIG. It is. Here, the value of the random number for winning the jackpot stored in the winning table for the low probability mode is included in the value of the random number for winning the jackpot stored in the winning table for the high probability mode.

  In addition, the value and the number of random numbers stored in each success / failure table are arbitrary, and it is only necessary that the high probability mode has a higher probability of being a “big win” than the low probability mode. In addition, the value of the random number that becomes the “big hit winning” stored in the high probability mode winning / failing table does not include the value of the random number that becomes the “big hit winning” stored in the low probability mode winning / failing table. Alternatively, it may include a part of the value of the random number that is “winning winning” stored in the success / failure table for the low probability mode.

Further, in each winning / failing lottery mode, except for the value of the random number that becomes “big hit winning”, the winning result is made without winning the big hit.
Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of loss results: “special loss results (small hit results)” and “normal loss results”. All of these losing results are common in that they do not trigger the success / failure lottery mode or the support mode. However, the “special failure result” is a trigger for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, whereas the “normal failure result” is not a trigger for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode.

Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within a range of 0 to 29 by adding 1 to the previous value every time it is updated, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value 29. .
The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37. Stored in Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored in the first result display section holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 36, and the game ball wins the lower operation port 37 It is stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes the jackpot type lottery (allocation lottery) when the jackpot occurs based on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

FIG. 8 is a diagram illustrating a distribution table that stores random values related to the jackpot type distribution destination.
As shown in FIG. 8, the random number value related to the jackpot type distribution destination is assigned to a distribution table (distribution table) in a distribution table storage area 63b (see FIG. 5) of the ROM 63 provided as a distribution information group storage unit. Minute information group). The distribution table includes a first distribution table (first distribution information group) illustrated in FIG. 8A and a second distribution table (second distribution information group) illustrated in FIG. 8B. ing.
The MPU 62 executes the lottery type lottery by comparing these distribution tables with the value of the big hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The first allocation table is for the value of the big hit type counter C2 shifted from the first result display holding area Ra to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the big hit type counter C2 based on the winning to the upper operating port 36. It is a table referred when performing a jackpot type lottery.
As shown in FIG. 8A, the first distribution table includes “low accuracy results (special distribution results corresponding to low probability)”, “unspecified low round high accuracy results (latent high probability results corresponding to small rounds). ) ”,“ Explicitly small round high-accuracy result (high probability result corresponding to small round) ”, and“ Most advantageous result (special distribution result corresponding to high probability) ”are set as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the first distribution table, among the values “0-29” of the jackpot type counter C2, “0-9” is assigned to the “low-accuracy result”, and “10-14” is indicated as “not explicitly low”. “Round high-precision result” is assigned, “15-19” is assigned to “explicit small round high-precision result”, and “20-29” is assigned to “most advantageous result”.

The second allocation table corresponds to the value of the big hit type counter C2 shifted from the second result display holding area Rb to the execution area AE, that is, the value of the big hit type counter C2 based on the winning to the lower operating port 37 It is a table referred when performing a lottery type lottery.
In the second distribution table, as shown in FIG. 8B, two distribution results of “low-accuracy result” and “most advantageous result” are used as distribution destinations. Specifically, in the second distribution table, among the values “0 to 29” of the big hit type counter C2, “0 to 9” is assigned to the “low probability result”, and “10 to 29” is assigned to the “most advantageous result”. ”.

Each distribution result has a difference in at least one of the following conditions (1) to (3).
(1) Win / Loot lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends (2) Support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends (3) Mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 38 in the opening / closing execution mode

First, the difference in the success / failure lottery mode (1) will be described.
The “low probability result” is a distribution result in which the success / failure lottery mode is set to the low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends regardless of the success / failure lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode ends. This low-probability mode is continued until at least a “hit win” is made in the lottery.
“Unexpected small round high-accuracy result”, “Explicit small round high-accuracy result”, and “Best advantage result” indicate that the winning lottery mode has a high probability after the opening / closing execution mode ends, regardless of the opening / closing lottery mode before the opening / closing execution mode ends. This is the distribution result set in the mode. This high-probability mode continues until at least a “hit win” is made in the winning lottery.

Next, the difference in the support mode (2) will be described.
The “low probability result” is a distribution result in which the support mode is set to the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends regardless of the support mode before the opening / closing execution mode ends. The high frequency support mode shifts to the low frequency support mode when the number of game times reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times).

The “non-explicit small round high-accuracy result” is a distribution result that maintains the support mode before the end of the open / close execution mode. Here, if the support mode before the end of the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode is continued until at least a “big hit win” is made in the winning / losing lottery.
The “explicit small round high-accuracy result” and “most advantageous result” are distribution results in which the support mode is set to the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends regardless of the support mode before the opening / closing execution mode ends. This high-frequency support mode is continued until at least a “big hit win” is made in the winning lottery.

  The difference in the opening / closing control mode of the variable winning device 38 in the opening / closing execution mode (3) will be described in detail later.

Next, the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 238 by adding 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, reaching the maximum value 238, and then returning to 0. .
The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b of the RAM 64 via the lottery counter buffer at the timing when the game ball wins the upper working port 36 or the lower working port 37. Stored in Specifically, the value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 36, and the game ball wins the lower operation port 37 It is stored in the second result display area reservation area Rb of the RAM 64 at the timing.
Then, the MPU 62 executes a lottery (reach generation lottery) as to whether or not to generate a reach display based on the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

The reach display is an expected effect that occurs when the “unusual winning result” is obtained instead of the “big hit winning” in the winning / losing lottery.
Specifically, the MPU 62 determines the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reach table and the reserved ball storage area 64b when the “unusual result” is obtained without winning the “big win” in the winning / losing lottery. And a lottery for determining whether or not to generate a reach display is executed. When a reach display is generated in the lottery, a reach display is generated. The reach table is a table that stores random values related to the occurrence of reach display, and is stored in a reach table storage area (not shown) of the ROM 63.

  Here, in the case where the winning / losing lottery is “big hit winning” and the distribution lottery is assigned to “the most advantageous result”, the symbol display device 51 receives the same odd number or the same even number as the stop result. The combination of symbols having the numbers is stopped and displayed on the active line L. In addition, in the case where the winning lottery is “big hit winning” and the distribution lottery is assigned to the “low probability result”, the symbol display device 51 displays the combination of symbols having the same even number as the stop result. Is stopped on the active line L. In addition, if the winning lottery results in a “big hit winning” and the distribution lottery is assigned to an “unspecified small round high-accuracy result” or “explicit small round high-accuracy result”, or in the winning lottery “ If the result is a “special loss result”, the symbol display device 51 selects the stop result as a “normal loss result” in the winning lottery instead of a combination of symbols having the same number. A special symbol combination having different numbers that are not displayed is stopped on the active line L.

  The reach display is when the combination of symbols having the same number is stopped and displayed in the end ("Large winning" is selected in the winning lottery, and it is distributed to the "most advantageous result" or "low probability result" in the distributing lottery) Occurs) regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. In addition, the reach display is a case where a special combination of symbols is finally stopped and displayed ("Big Winning Winning" in the winning lottery and "Inexplicitly Small Round High Probability Result" or "Explicit Small Round High in the Sorting Lottery) When it is distributed to “probable result”, or when it is “special loss result” without being “big win” in the winning / failing lottery, it does not occur regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

The reach display mode is such that some of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 (for example, the symbol row Z1 and the symbol row Z3) are on the effective line L. By stopping the display, the same symbol combination is displayed to suggest the stop result, and the remaining symbol row (for example, symbol row Z2) is variably displayed in that state.
Accordingly, the pachinko machine 10 generates a reach display, and after the variable display is started on the symbol display device 51, before the predetermined stop result is displayed, the winning / no-win lottery becomes “big hit winning” It is possible to cause the player to expect that the “low-precision result” or “the most advantageous result” is assigned in the distribution lottery.

  Note that the reach display mode is not limited to this. A part of the symbol sequence is stopped and displayed, and the remaining symbol sequence is variably displayed. Alternatively, a predetermined character or the like may be displayed as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen G after each symbol row is reduced or displayed.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 has an expected effect as a kind of variable display of the symbol display device 51. An expected effect is to make a player expect that a winning game will be a “big win” after displaying a variable on the symbol display device 51 and before displaying a predetermined stop result. Directing. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of expected effects, the reach display described above and the notice display.

The notice display will not be a “Big Winner” in the winning lottery if it is a “Big Winner” in the winning lottery, or if it is a “special loss result” without being a “Big Winner” in the winning lottery This is an expected effect that makes it easier to generate an effect than when a “normally off result” is obtained. This notice display may make it easy to select an effect having a low appearance rate instead of making it easy to generate an effect, or may combine these effects.
The lottery for determining whether or not to generate a reach display is executed by the main control device 60, whereas the lottery for determining whether or not to generate a notice display is executed by the sound emission control device 90. .

The notice display mode is such that all of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 among the plurality of symbol rows Z1 to Z3 displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 are variably displayed or a part of the symbol rows (for example, In a situation where a plurality of symbol strings (for example, symbol strings Z2 and Z3) are variably displayed after the symbol string Z1) is stopped and displayed on the effective line L, a predetermined character or the like is displayed on the display screen G as a moving image. indicate. This notice display is generated in both cases where reach display is generated and reach display is not generated, but is set so that it is more likely to occur when reach display is generated than when reach display is not generated. Has been.
Note that the notice display is not limited to this, and may be displayed with the background changed, for example, or may be displayed with the form of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 changed.

Finally, the variation type counter CS will be described. The fluctuation type counter CS is, for example, a loop counter that loops within the range of 0 to 198 by adding 1 to the previous value every time it is updated, and returning to 0 after reaching the maximum value 198. .
The variation type counter CS is updated at least once every execution of a normal process described later, and is stored in the lottery counter buffer each time the update is performed.
Then, the MPU 62 determines the pattern display duration in the main display unit 45 and the symbol display duration in the symbol display device 51 based on the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the lottery counter buffer. Note that these display duration times will be described later in detail.

<Various processes executed by main controller 60>
The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing for progressing the game, and main processing that is activated when the power is turned on. Hereinafter, the timer interrupt process, the normal process, and the main process will be described in order.
The MPU 62 executes an NMI interrupt process that is activated by input of a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal) in addition to the timer interrupt process, the normal process, and the main process, but the description of this process is omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 9 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process.
In the timer interrupt process, the MPU 62 periodically executes steps S101 to S105 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) as shown in FIG.

In step S101, the MPU 62 executes a reading process for the plurality of detection sensors 50a to 50g. In this reading process, the MPU 62 reads the states of the plurality of detection sensors 50a to 50g, determines the states, and stores them in the RAM 64 as winning detection information. When the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensors 50a to 50d corresponding to the various winning openings detect the winning of the game ball, the MPU 62 sets a winning ball command for instructing the paying out of the winning ball. The command is transmitted to the payout control device 70. For example, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 50d corresponding to the variable winning device 38 has detected the winning of the game ball, the MPU 62 gives a prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls that are a specific unit number. Is sent to the payout control device 70.
The payout control device 70 performs payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out a prize ball based on a prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 62.

  In step S102, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 updates the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI by adding 1 and stores the updated value in the lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. To do. When the MPU 62 reaches the maximum value when adding 1 to the previous value of the random number initial value counter CINI, the MPU 62 resets the value of the random number initial value counter CINI to 0 and clears it.

  In step S103, the MPU 62 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 updates the previous value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 by adding 1 respectively, and updates it. The later value is stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. When the MPU 62 reaches the maximum value when adding 1 to the previous value of each of the counters C1 to C4, the MPU 62 resets the values of the counters C1 to C4 to 0 and clears them.

In step S104, the MPU 62 executes a through winning process. In this through winning process, if the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 50f corresponding to each through gate 41 has detected the winning of the game ball, the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103. Is stored in the electronic role holding area 64c. In addition, the MPU 62 sets a command for turning on the third hold lamp unit 55 and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 90.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 lights the third hold lamp unit 55 based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62. Further, as described above, the maximum number of reserved game balls won in the through gate 41 is four, and the third reserved lamp section 55 lights up in a number corresponding to the reserved number.

In step S105, the MPU 62 executes a winning process for the operation port.
Hereinafter, the winning process for the working opening will be described in detail.

<Winning process for working port>
FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a winning process for an operation port.
In the winning process for the operating port, the MPU 62 executes steps S201 to S207 as shown in FIG.

  In step S201, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the game ball has won (start prize) at the upper operation port 36 by determining whether or not the detection sensor 50b corresponding to the upper operation port 36 has detected a winning of the game ball. Determine whether. If the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has won the upper working port 36, in step S202, the MPU 62 grasps the number of reservations stored in the first result display unit reservation area Ra, and holds the reservation. The number is set as a first start reserved memory number RaN in a predetermined storage area in the first result display area reserved area Ra. Thereafter, the MPU 62 executes the processing after step S205.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S201 that the game ball has not won the upper operation port 36, the detection sensor 50c corresponding to the lower operation port 37 receives the game ball win in step S203. It is determined whether or not a game ball has won a prize (start prize) at the lower operating port 37 by determining whether or not the above has been detected.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S203 that the game ball has not won the lower operation port 37, the MPU 62 ends the operation port winning process. If the MPU 62 determines in step S203 that the game ball has won the lower operating port 37, in step S204, the MPU 62 grasps the number of holds stored in the second result display holding area Rb. The reserved number is set as a second start reserved memory number RbN in a predetermined storage area in the second result display area reserved area Rb. Thereafter, the MPU 62 executes the processing after step S205.

After executing the process of step S202 or step S204, the MPU 62 determines that the start pending storage number N (RaN or RbN) set in step S202 or step S204 is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) in step S205. It is determined whether or not there is.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the start-pending storage number N is not less than the upper limit, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the operating port. When the MPU 62 determines in step S205 that the start pending storage number N is less than the upper limit value, in step S206, the MPU 62 adds 1 to the value of the start pending storage number N and updates it.

  In step S207, the MPU 62 sets a combination of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process in the free storage area of the result display unit reserved area. The information is stored as the hold information in the first storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the number N of start hold storage updated in step S206.

  For example, when the MPU 62 sets the first start pending storage number RaN in step S202, each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process The set of values is stored as hold information in the first storage area in the free storage area of the first result display section hold area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first start hold storage number RaN updated in step S206. For example, when “3” is set to the first start pending storage number RaN in step S202, the MPU 62 is a storage area corresponding to “4” of the first start pending storage number RaN updated in step S206. The hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Ra4.

  For example, when the MPU 62 sets the second start pending storage number RbN in step S204, the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 of the timer interrupt process Are stored as hold information in the first storage area in the free storage area of the second result display section hold area Rb, that is, the storage area corresponding to the second start hold storage number RbN updated in step S206. To do. For example, when “3” is set in the second start pending storage number RbN in step S204, the MPU 62 is a storage area corresponding to “4” in the second start pending storage number RbN updated in step S206. Hold information is stored in a certain fourth area Rb4.

In step S207, the MPU 62 sets a command for lighting the first hold lamp unit 53 or the second hold lamp unit 54, and transmits the set command to the sound emission control device 90. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the winning process for the operation port.
The sound emission control device 90 turns on the first hold lamp unit 53 or the second hold lamp unit 54 based on a command transmitted from the MPU 62. Further, as described above, the maximum number of reserved game balls won in the upper operating port 36 or the lower operating port 37 is four. The corresponding number of lights up.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of normal processing.
The MPU 62 executes a main process, which will be described later, which starts when the power is turned on, and then executes a normal process that is a main process for advancing the game. In this normal process, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S313 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the MPU 62 periodically executes steps S301 to S308 at a cycle of 4 msec, repeatedly executes steps S307 to S310 when the remaining time occurs, and performs steps S311 and subsequent steps according to the determination result of step S307. Execute.

  In step S301, the MPU 62 executes an external output process for transmitting the command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process to each control device on the sub side. In this external output process, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a prize ball command is set. If it is determined that a prize ball command is set, the MPU 62 sends the prize ball command to the payout control device 70. Send. In addition, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not an effect command such as a command corresponding to an effect for game times or a command corresponding to an effect for an opening / closing execution mode is set, and the effect command is If it is determined that it has been set, the command for the effect is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90.

  In step S302, the MPU 62 updates the variation type counter CS. Specifically, as described above, the MPU 62 updates the previous value of the variation type counter CS by adding 1, and stores the updated value in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64. . When the MPU 62 reaches the maximum value when adding 1 to the previous value of the variation type counter CS, the MPU 62 returns the value of the variation type counter CS to 0 and clears it.

In step S303, the MPU 62 executes a game times control process for advancing game times. In the game times control process, the MPU 62 executes the winning / losing lottery and the distribution lottery, determines the information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 51, and the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45. Determine information related to
In step S304, the MPU 62 executes a game state transition process for shifting the game state. In the gaming state transition processing, the MPU 62 executes transition processing to each gaming state such as the opening / closing execution mode, the high probability mode, and the high frequency support mode.
The game turn control process in step S303 and the game state transition process in step S304 will be described in detail later.

  In step S <b> 305, the MPU 62 executes a power combination support process for performing drive control of the power combination 37 a provided in the lower operation port 37. In the electric utility support process, the MPU 62 executes the electric accessory release lottery based on the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electric utility reservation area 64c of the RAM 64, and performs the electric accessory release lottery. In the case of winning, an opening / closing process of the electric accessory 37a is executed. In addition, the MPU 62 performs display control of the accessory display unit 46 so as to display the result of the electric accessory release lottery.

  In step S306, the MPU 62 executes a game ball launch control process. In this game ball launch control process, the MPU 62 causes the power supply / fire control device 80 to launch a game ball based on the fact that the player has rotated the launch handle 27. Specifically, the power supply / launch control device 80 causes the game ball launching mechanism 81 to launch a game ball by exciting a solenoid of the game ball launching mechanism 81 at a predetermined period (0.6 sec in the present embodiment). . Note that the solenoid is excited so as to launch a game ball with a firing intensity corresponding to the amount of rotational operation of the launch handle 27. Further, the power supply / launch control device 80 supplies a drive signal to the solenoid of the game ball launch mechanism 81 to fire the game ball when a predetermined launch condition is satisfied.

  In step S307, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a power failure flag is set in a power failure flag storage area (not shown) of the RAM 64. This power failure flag is set in the RAM 64 when a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board 65 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 62. The power failure monitoring board 65 outputs this power failure signal when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed. This power failure flag is cleared at the next execution of the main process.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 sets various flags by substituting 1 into a predetermined area such as the RAM 64, and clears various flags by substituting 0. For example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the power failure flag by assigning 1 to the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64 and clears the power failure flag by assigning 0 to the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64.

  If the MPU 62 determines in step S307 that the power failure flag has been set, the MPU 62 performs the power interruption processing after step S311 without executing the processing after step S308. Specifically, in step S311, the MPU 62 prohibits the occurrence of timer interrupt processing. In step S312, the MPU 62 calculates and stores a RAM determination value (a checksum of the RAM 64). In step S313, the MPU 62 prohibits access to the RAM 64. Thereafter, the MPU 62 continues the infinite loop until the power supply is completely shut down and the processing cannot be executed.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S307 that the power failure flag is not set, in step S308, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the timing for executing the next normal process has been reached, that is, the current normal process. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S308 that the timing for executing the next normal process has not come, that is, if the remaining time has occurred, the MPU 62 updates the random number initial value counter CINI in step S309, and step S310. Then, the variation type counter CS is updated. The MPU 62 repeatedly executes steps S307 to S310 until it is determined in step S308 that the next normal processing timing has been reached.

  On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S308 that the next normal processing timing has been reached, that is, when the remaining time has not occurred, the MPU 62 executes the next step S301 to execute the next time. Start normal processing.

<Main processing>
FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the main process.
In the main process, the MPU 62 executes steps S401 to S412 as shown in FIG.
In step S401, the MPU 62 executes a start-up process as the power is turned on. In this start-up process, the MPU 62 waits for a sub-side control board (such as the sound emission control board 91) to be operable, and a predetermined time (for example, about 500 msec) elapses after the power is turned on. Wait until

  In step S402, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 1 sec which is a permission prohibition period has elapsed. If the MPU 62 determines that 1 sec has not elapsed in step S402, the MPU 62 repeatedly executes the process of step S402. Further, when the MPU 62 determines in step S402 that 1 sec has elapsed, the MPU 62 executes the processing after step S403.

  Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 1 sec has elapsed by counting the number of executions of the process of step S402. For example, when the interval at which the process of step S402 is repeatedly executed is 0.1 msec, the MPU 62 determines that 1 sec has elapsed when the number of executions of the process of step S402 is counted and reaches 10,000. Note that the configuration for measuring the permission prohibition period is arbitrary. For example, the permission prohibition period may be measured using a real-time clock.

In step S403, the MPU 62 permits access to the RAM 64.
In step S <b> 404, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a RAM erase switch (not shown) provided in the power / fire control device 80 is turned on.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is on, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S409.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S404 that the RAM erase switch is not turned on, in step S405, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a power failure flag is set in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64. To do.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S405 that the power failure flag has not been set, the MPU 62 executes processing in step S409 and subsequent steps.
In contrast, if the MPU 62 determines that the power failure flag is set in step S405, the MPU 62 calculates a RAM determination value in step S406.
In step S407, the MPU 62 confirms the validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 by determining whether or not the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 is normal. Specifically, the MPU 62 compares the RAM determination value calculated in step S406 with the RAM determination value stored in step S312 (processing at power interruption) of the normal process. The RAM determination value is determined to be normal, and if they do not match, the RAM determination value is determined to be abnormal.

If the MPU 62 determines that the RAM determination value is not normal in step S407, the MPU 62 executes processing in step S409 and subsequent steps.
In contrast, if the MPU 62 determines that the RAM determination value is normal in step S407, the MPU 62 clears the power failure flag stored in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 64 in step S408.

  The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be determined by a method different from the method for confirming the consistency of the RAM determination value. For example, a keyword is assigned to a predetermined area of the RAM 64 during power interruption processing. The validity of the data stored in the RAM 64 may be confirmed by determining whether or not this keyword is normally written by the main process.

As described above, the MPU 62 determines that the RAM erase switch is turned on in step S404, determines that the power failure flag is not set in step S405, or determines the RAM determination value in step S407. If it is determined that is not normal, the processing after step S409 is executed.
Specifically, the MPU 62 clears the work area of the RAM 64 in step S409, and executes initialization of the RAM 64 in step S410.

  Therefore, for example, the manager of the game hall can initialize the data stored in the RAM 64 by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10 while pressing down the RAM erase switch when the game hall starts business. Further, the pachinko machine 10 initializes the data stored in the RAM 64 when the occurrence of a power failure is not confirmed on the power failure monitoring board 65 or when the RAM determination value is abnormal.

  After executing the process of step S408 or step S410, the MPU 62 transmits an initial command to the sub-side control board (such as the sound emission control board 91) in step S411, and in step S412, the timer interrupt process is generated. Is permitted, and the process proceeds to the normal processing described above.

  By receiving the initial command transmitted in step S411, the sub-side control board recognizes that communication with the main control board 61 is normally performed, and executes predetermined processing. Specifically, for example, the sound emission control board 91 holds the game ball by driving the upper plate 401a and the lower plate 401b by the plate driving unit 401c and driving the guide member 402d by the guide member driving unit 402e. The operation check of the mechanism 40 is executed. The sound emission control board 91 sets the upper plate 401a and the lower plate 401b in the closed state by driving the upper plate 401a and the lower plate 401b by the plate driving unit 401c after performing the operation check. The sound emission control board 91 drives the guide member 402d by the guide member drive unit 402e, thereby setting the guide member 402d in the top entry state.

<Game times control processing>
FIG. 13 is a flowchart of the game times control process.
In the game times control process, the MPU 62 executes steps S501 to S509 as shown in FIG.
In step S501, the MPU 62 determines whether or not it is in the opening / closing execution mode. If the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that it is in the opening / closing execution mode, it ends the game number control process without executing the processes in and after step S502. Therefore, when it is determined that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the MPU 62 does not start the progress of the game round regardless of whether or not the winning of the game ball to each of the operation ports 36 and 37 is detected.
The MPU 62 refers to the open / close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64 to determine whether the open / close execution mode is in effect. The same applies to the following processes. The MPU 62 sets an opening / closing execution mode flag when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, and clears the opening / closing execution mode flag when the opening / closing execution mode ends.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S501 that it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, in step S502, whether or not the main display unit 45 is variably displayed, that is, the game is in progress. It is determined whether or not.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S502 that the main display unit 45 is not in a variable display, the MPU 62 executes a game turn start process in steps S503 to S505.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the main display unit 45 is in a variable display in step S502, the MPU 62 executes the process for advancing game times in steps S506 to S509.

First, the game turn start process in steps S503 to S505 will be described.
In step S503, the MPU 62 grasps the number of reservations stored in the first result display section reservation area Ra and the number of reservations stored in the second result display section reservation area Rb, and these reservation numbers. It is determined whether or not the total number CRN of “0” is “0”. If the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is “0”, the MPU 62 ends the game times control process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S503 that the total number CRN is not “0”, in step S504, the MPU 62 holds the first result display area reservation area Ra or the second result display area reservation area Rb. A data setting process for setting the hold information stored in the game information for use in game times is executed. Thereafter, in step S505, the MPU 62 starts a variation display on the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 51 to execute variation start processing for digesting the game times, and ends the game times control processing.
Hereinafter, the data setting process in step S504 and the change start process in step S505 will be described in detail.

FIG. 14 is a flowchart of the data setting process.
In the data setting process, the MPU 62 executes steps S601 to S611 as shown in FIG.
In step S601, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second start reserved memory number RbN of the second result display portion reservation area Rb set in step S204 of the operation port winning process is “0”. . When the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start pending storage number RbN is “0”, the MPU 62 executes the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S602 to S606, and then proceeds to step S601. If it is determined that the second start pending storage number RbN is not “0”, the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S607 to S611 is executed.

Thus, the data setting process includes a data setting process for the first result display unit that sets the holding information stored in the holding area Ra for the first result display unit for use in the game times, and a second result display unit. And a data setting process for the second result display section for setting the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for use in game times.
Then, if the MPU 62 determines in step S601 that the second start pending storage number RbN is not “0”, the MPU 62 does not execute the data setting process for the first result display unit, but for the second result display unit. Execute the data setting process. In other words, when the MPU 62 determines that there is the holding information stored in the second result display unit holding area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the lower working port 37, Regardless of whether or not there is holding information stored in the first result display area holding area Ra based on the winning of the game ball, the holding information stored in the second result display area holding area Rb is preferentially played. Set for 1 digestion.

First, the data setting process for the first result display unit in steps S602 to S606 will be described.
In step S602, the MPU 62 updates by subtracting 1 from the value of the first start hold storage number RaN of the first result display section hold area Ra.
In step S603, the MPU 62 moves the hold information stored in the first area Ra1 of the first result display section hold area Ra to the execution area AE.
In step S604, the MPU 62 executes a data shift process for shifting the hold information stored in the storage area of the first result display portion hold area Ra. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the hold information stored in each area Ra1 to Ra4 to the first area Ra1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the hold information of the second area Ra2 to the first area Ra1, shifts the hold information of the third area Ra3 to the second area Ra2, and sets the hold information of the fourth area Ra4 to the third area Ra3. Shift to area Ra3.

  In step S605, the MPU 62 clears the second result display unit flag stored in the RAM 64. This second result display part flag is a flag for specifying which main display part 45 of the first result display part 45a and the second result display part 45b starts the variable display when the game times are digested. It is. In this step S605, since the MPU 62 has cleared the second result display portion flag, the variable display is displayed on the first result display portion 45a based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 36 when the game times are digested. Indicates that you want to start.

In step S606, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the shift of the hold information has been executed, transmits the set shift command to the sound emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. The command at the time of shift is a voice light emission control device indicating that the hold information has been shifted with respect to the hold information stored in the hold area Ra for the first result display section based on the winning of the game ball to the upper working port 36. The information for making 90 recognize is included.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the first hold lamp unit 53 based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 decreases the number of lighting of the first holding lamp unit 53 with a decrease in the number of reserved game balls won in the upper operation port 36.

Next, the data setting process for the second result display unit in steps S607 to S611 will be described.
In step S607, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the second start hold storage number RbN in the second result display section hold area Rb and updates it.
In step S608, the MPU 62 moves the hold information stored in the second area Rb1 of the second result display unit hold area Rb to the execution area AE.
In step S609, the MPU 62 executes a data shift process for shifting the hold information stored in the storage area of the second result display portion hold area Rb. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the hold information stored in each area Rb1 to Rb4 to the first area Rb1 side. Specifically, the MPU 62 shifts the hold information of the second area Rb2 to the first area Rb1, shifts the hold information of the third area Rb3 to the second area Rb2, and sets the hold information of the fourth area Rb4 to the third area Rb2. Shift to area Rb3.

  In step S610, the MPU 62 sets the second result display unit flag in the RAM 64. In this step S610, since the MPU 62 has set the second result display section flag, on the basis of the winning of the game ball to the lower operation port 37, the variable display is displayed on the second result display section 45b when the game times are digested. Indicates that you want to start.

In step S611, the MPU 62 sets a shift command for recognizing that the hold information has been shifted, transmits the set shift command to the sound emission control device 90, and ends the data setting process. This command at the time of shift indicates that the hold information has been shifted with respect to the hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second result display section based on the winning of the game ball to the lower working port 37. The information for making 90 recognize is included.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 changes the lighting state of the second holding lamp unit 54 based on the shift command transmitted from the MPU 62. Specifically, the sound emission control device 90 decreases the number of lighting of the second holding lamp portion 54 as the number of reserved gaming balls won in the lower operation port 37 decreases.

FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the change start process.
In the change start process, the MPU 62 executes steps S701 to S718 as shown in FIG.
In step S701, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning / raising lottery mode is the high probability mode.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S701 that the success / failure lottery mode is not the high probability mode, in step S702, the MPU 62 obtains the success / failure table for the low probability mode (see FIG. 7A) from the acceptance table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. If it is determined in step S701 that the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, in step S703, the high probability mode success / failure table (see FIG. 7B) is stored in the ROM63's success / failure table storage area 63a. read out.

  After executing the process of step S702 or step S703, the MPU 62 executes a determination processing in step S704. In this success / failure determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with the success / failure table read in step S702 or step S703, thereby determining the result of the success / failure lottery (result of success / failure). Determine. As described above, the success / failure result is one of “big win”, “special failure result”, and “normal failure result”, and even if the success / failure lottery mode is a low probability mode, it is a high probability mode. But the same is true.

  In step S705, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the result of the determination in step S704 is “big hit winning”. If the MPU 62 determines in step S705 that the winning / failing result is “big hit winning”, the MPU 62 executes the processing after step S706, and if it is determined in step S705 that the winning / failing result is not “big win winning”. Then, the processing after step S712 is executed.

First, a process (process after step S706) when it is determined in step S705 that the MPU 62 determines that the winning / failing result is “big win” will be described.
In step S706, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S706 that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 starts variable display on the first result display unit 45a based on the winning of the game ball in the upper working port 36. In step S707, the first distribution table (see FIG. 8A) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S706 that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, the second result display unit 45b based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation port 37 is used. In step S708, the second distribution table (see FIG. 8B) is read from the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

  After executing the process of step S707 or step S708, the MPU 62 executes a distribution determination process in step S709. In this distribution determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE with the distribution table read in step S707 or step S708, thereby determining the result of distribution lottery ( Distribution result).

  In step S710, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for the jackpot result. In the stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the MPU 62 determines in step S709 information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45. The determination is made according to the distribution result, and the determined information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 compares the allocation result determined in step S709 with the jackpot result stop result table stored in advance in the ROM 63, so that the main display unit 45 finally displays a stop display. Determine such information. The jackpot result stop result table defines the pattern form to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 for each sorting result.

In step S711, the MPU 62 sets a flag corresponding to the distribution result determined in step S709 in the RAM 64. Specifically, the MPU 62 sets the low-accuracy result flag when specifying that the distribution result is “low-accuracy result”, and identifies that it is “inexplicitly small round high-accuracy result”. In this case, the non-explicit small round high-accuracy result flag is set. If it is specified that the result is "explicit small round high-accuracy result", the explicit low-round high-accuracy result flag is set and "best result" is set. If it is specified that the maximum advantageous result flag is set. Thereafter, the MPU 62 executes the processing after step S716.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 62 executes the determination of the distribution result by referring to these flags.

Next, a process (step S712 and subsequent processes) performed when it is determined in step S705 that the winning / failing result is not “winning winning” in the MPU 62 will be described.
In step S712, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the determination result determined in step S704 is a “special loss result”.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S712 that the success / failure result is “special outage result”, the MPU 62 executes processing subsequent to step S713, and in step S712 determines that the success / failure result is not “special outage result”. In step S715 and subsequent steps, the process is executed.

In step S713, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for a special loss result. In the stop result setting process for the special outlier result, the MPU 62 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, and the determination The stored information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 determines information related to the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 by referring to the stop result table for the special loss result stored in advance in the ROM 63. The mode of the pattern set in the stop result table for the special loss result is different from the mode of the pattern set in the stop result table for the jackpot result.
In step S714, the MPU 62 sets a special out flag in the RAM 64.
In each of the following processes, the MPU 62 refers to the special out flag to determine whether or not the result is a “special out result”.

  On the other hand, in step S715, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for a normal off result. In the stop result setting process for the normal off result, the MPU 62 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, and the determination The stored information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 refers to the stop result table for the normal detachment result stored in advance in the ROM 63, and determines information related to the pattern that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45. The pattern mode set in the stop result table for the normal loss result is different from the pattern mode set in the stop result table for the jackpot result and the stop result table for the special loss result.

After executing any one of steps S711, S714, and S715, the MPU 62 executes display duration (display duration) setting processing in step S716.
In the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 acquires the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64.

  Further, in the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not reach display occurs in the symbol display device 51. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result determined in step S709 is a “low-accuracy result” or “most advantageous result”, and the success / failure result determined in step S704 is “normal out-of-range result”. At the same time, when the reach generation lottery is won, it is determined that the reach display is generated. The MPU 62 executes the reach generation lottery by comparing the reach table stored in advance in the ROM 63 with the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

When the MPU 62 determines that the reach display is generated, the MPU 62 refers to the reach generation display duration table stored in the ROM 63 to display the value corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired from the variation type counter buffer. The duration is determined, and the determined display duration is set in a display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 62 refers to the reach non-occurrence display duration table stored in the ROM 63 to obtain the variation type counter acquired from the variation type counter buffer. The display duration corresponding to the value of CS is determined, and the determined display duration is set in a display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

Specifically, the reach non-occurrence display duration table is set so that the display duration is shortened as the number of reserved items increases. Therefore, the display continuation time when digesting the hold information related to the upper operation port 36 is set to be shorter as the number of reservations related to the upper operation port 36 increases. And the display continuation time at the time of digesting the hold information concerning the lower operation port 37 is set so as to become shorter as the number of the hold operations related to the lower operation port 37 increases. The reach non-occurrence display duration table is set so that the display duration is shorter when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode than when the support mode is the low-frequency support mode. In other words, if the number of holdings is the same, the display duration in the high frequency support mode is shorter than that in the low frequency support mode.
Further, the display duration determined by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table is different from the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table.

  Note that the display non-occurrence display duration table may be set in a reverse relationship to the relationship described above, such as the display duration becomes longer as the number of holds increases, depending on the number of holds and the support mode. It is good also as a structure which does not fluctuate. The reach generation display duration table and the non-reach display duration table may be the same. Furthermore, a display duration table may be set individually for each of the success / failure results and the distribution results.

In step S717, the MPU 62 sets a change command and a type command. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the change command and the type command set in step S717 to the sound emission control device 90.
The sound emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the change command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62. This process will be described in detail later.

The change command includes information related to the display duration time. Further, the change command does not include information on whether or not reach display occurs.
Here, as described above, the display duration determined by referring to the reach occurrence display duration table and the display duration determined by referring to the reach non-occurrence display duration table are mutually Is different.
Therefore, even if information indicating whether or not reach display occurs is not included in the change command, reach display is performed by the sound emission control device 90 which is the sub-side control device based on the information related to the display duration time. It is possible to determine whether or not it occurs. In this sense, it can be said that the change command indirectly includes information on whether or not reach display occurs. Note that the change command may directly include information on whether or not reach display occurs.

The type command includes information related to the result of the determination. In other words, the type command includes, as information related to the success / failure result, information related to “big win”, “special loss result”, and “normal loss result”. The type command includes information related to the distribution result. In other words, the type command includes, as information related to the distribution result, each of the “low-precision result”, “non-explicit small round high-precision result”, “explicit small round high-precision result”, and “best advantage result”. Contains information.
In the following description, the result of the success / failure and the distribution result are collectively referred to as a game result. In other words, the type command includes information related to the game result.

In step S718, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, and causes the main display unit 45 to start variable display based on the determination result. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the change start process.
Specifically, if the MPU 62 determines that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 64, the first game ball is awarded based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 36 when the game times are digested. Since the result display unit 45a indicates that the variable display is started, the first result display unit 45a starts the variable display.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 determines the second based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation port 37 when the game times are digested. Since the result display unit 45b indicates that the variable display is started, the second result display unit 45b starts the variable display.

Returning to the description of the game times control processing, the game times progress processing in steps S506 to S509 will be described with reference to FIG.
In step S502, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the main display unit 45 is in a variable display. If the MPU 62 determines that the main display unit 45 is in a variable display, the game progress proceeds from step S506 to step S509. Process.

  In step S506, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the display continuation time set in step S716 of the change start process has elapsed. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value set in the display duration counter of the RAM 64 has become “0”. The value of the display duration counter is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value every time the timer interrupt process is executed.

  If the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has not elapsed, the MPU 62 executes a variable display process in step S507. In this variation display process, the MPU 62 updates the display of the main display unit 45 during the variation display. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the game times control process.

  On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S506 that the display continuation time has elapsed, the MPU 62 executes a variation end process in step S508. In this variation end process, the MPU 62 stores the information stored in the RAM 64 in the process of any one of steps S710, S713, and S715 of the variation start process executed when the main display unit 45 starts the variation display (main The information related to the pattern that is finally stopped and displayed on the display unit 45 is specified. Then, at the end of the game round, the MPU 62 executes display control of the main display unit 45 so that a picture corresponding to the specified information is displayed on the main display unit 45 during variable display.

Here, the pattern that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 is different for each type of game result. Therefore, a game hall manager or the like can check the game result by viewing the main display unit 45 at the end of the game round. According to this, for example, the manager of the game hall can easily confirm whether or not an illegal act is attempted to cause the pachinko machine 10 to perform the same behavior as in the case of winning a lottery with a big hit. Can be done automatically.
Further, the display area of the main display unit 45 is narrower than that of the display screen G of the symbol display device 51, and the symbols to be stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 are displayed on the display screen G of the symbol display device 51. Compared to Z1 to Z3, it is difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, at the end of the game round, the player determines whether or not the big win lottery is won by checking the display screen G of the symbol display device 51 instead of the main display unit 45, and so on. The degree of attention to the screen G can be increased.

In step S509, the MPU 62 sets a change end command. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the change end command set in step S509 to the sound emission control device 90. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the game times control process.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 executes a process for ending the effect of the game time based on the change end command transmitted from the MPU 62. Here, the sound emission control device 90 may be configured to end the game times effect independently without requiring the reception of the variation end command.

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the game state transition process.
In the gaming state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S814 as shown in FIG.
In step S801, the MPU 62 determines whether or not it is in the opening / closing execution mode.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S802.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that it is in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes processing from step S811 onward.

First, a process when the MPU 62 determines that it is not in the opening / closing execution mode in step S801 (process after step S802) will be described.
In step S802, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the variable display on the main display unit 45 has ended. If the MPU 62 determines in step S802 that the variable display on the main display unit 45 has not ended, the MPU 62 ends the gaming state transition process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S802 that the variable display on the main display unit 45 has been completed, in step S803, whether or not the determination result corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. Determine whether. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the success / failure result is “big win” or “special loss result”.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the result is corresponding to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the flag in the opening / closing execution mode in the RAM 64, and then executes the processing from step S804.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the result is not corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode (when the result is determined to be a “normal outage result”), the game End the state transition process.

In step S804, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the result is a “special loss result”.
If it is determined in step S804 that the result is “special outage result”, the MPU 62 sets “2” to the open / close counter SOC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S805. This open / close counter SOC is a counter for specifying the total number of times the MPU 62 opens and closes the large winning opening 38a of the variable winning device 38 when shifting to the open / close execution mode.

  On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S804 that the success / failure result is not “special loss result”, that is, if the determination is that the success / failure result is “big win”, in step S806, the distribution result Is a small round high-accuracy result (“inexplicit small round high-precision result” or “explicit small round high-precision result”).

  If the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the distribution result is a small round high-accuracy result, the MPU 62 sets “2” in the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S807. If the MPU 62 determines in step S806 that the distribution result is not a low-round high-accuracy result, that is, if the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result is a “low-accuracy result” or “most favorable result”, the step In S808, “15” is set in the round counter RC. The round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 62 when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a plurality of opening / closing execution modes having different end conditions. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has, as the opening / closing execution mode, a round number regulation mode that shifts when the success / failure result is “big win”, and the opening / closing number that shifts when the success / failure result is “special loss result”. And a prescribed mode.

The round number regulation mode ends on condition that a predetermined number of round games have been executed. Here, the number of round games corresponds to the value set in the round counter RC.
The opening / closing number regulation mode ends on condition that opening / closing of the predetermined number of large winning openings 38a has been executed or that a predetermined number of game balls have won the large winning openings 38a. Here, the total number of times of opening / closing the special winning opening 38a corresponds to the value set in the opening / closing counter SOC. This open / close number regulation mode does not end on condition of the number of round games executed.

Note that the pachinko machine 10 opens and closes the one big winning opening 38a for one round game. One round game is continued until one of the following two conditions is satisfied. In other words, after the pachinko machine 10 sets the open / close door 38b to the open state, the pachinko machine 10 sets the open / close door 38b to the closed state again by satisfying one of the following two conditions.
(1) A predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses. (2) The total number of winning game balls to the big prize opening 38a reaches a predetermined upper limit.

  After executing one of the processes of step S805, step S807, and step S808, the MPU 62 sets the waiting time (waiting period) for opening the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S809. Set “1000”. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value every time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 2 sec. Note that the waiting time is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

As described above, when the MPU 62 determines in step S803 that the result of the success / failure corresponds to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 sets the waiting time for opening to the timer counter T regardless of the type of game result. set. In other words, the waiting time for opening is the same regardless of the type of game result.
In addition, the waiting time for opening is not limited to this, For example, it is good also as a structure which is slightly different according to the kind of game result to such an extent that it is recognized that it is similar to a player. In addition, for example, the waiting time for the opening is greatly different between a game result of “low probability result” or “most advantageous result” and a game result other than these, etc. It is good also as a structure made to differ greatly according to the kind of.

In step S810, the MPU 62 sets an opening command. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the gaming state transition process. This opening command includes information on the game result that triggered the transition to the opening / closing execution mode. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the opening command set in step S810 to the sound emission control device 90.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 recognizes the shift to the opening / closing execution mode based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62 and executes a predetermined process. This process will be described in detail later.

Next, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the open / close execution mode is being performed in step S801 (process after step S811) will be described.
In step S811, the MPU 62 executes a special winning opening / closing process.

FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special prize opening / closing process.
In the special winning opening / closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S901 to S924 as shown in FIG.
In step S901, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the special winning opening 38a is being opened.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the special winning opening 38a is not being opened, the MPU 62 executes processing in step S902 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the special winning opening 38a is being opened, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S906.

First, the processing (processing after step S902) when it is determined in step S901 that the MPU 62 does not open the special prize opening 38a will be described.
In step S902, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the open / close counter SOC is “0” and the value of the round counter RC is “0”.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that both the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are “0”, the MPU 62 ends the big prize opening / closing process.

In contrast, if the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that at least one of the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not “0”, the value of the timer counter T is determined in step S903. Is determined to be “0”.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the value of the timer counter T is not “0”, the MPU 62 ends the big prize opening / closing process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the value of the timer counter T is “0”, the MPU 62 executes a big prize opening release process in step S904.
Hereinafter, the special winning opening opening process in step S904 will be described in detail.

FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special winning opening opening process.
In the big prize opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1009 as shown in FIG.
In step S <b> 1001, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the result is “special outage result”.

  If the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the result is “special loss result”, in step S1002, the MPU 62 sets “8” to the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. In S1003, the timer counter T is set to “85”. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value every time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 0.17 sec.

  On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the result is not “special outage result”, the MPU 62 sets “8” to the winning counter PC in step S1004, and in step S1005, the distribution result. Is a small round high-accuracy result (“inexplicit small round high-precision result” or “explicit small round high-precision result”).

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1005 that the distribution result is a small round high-accuracy result, the MPU 62 sets “85” to the timer counter T in step S1003 described above.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1005 that the distribution result is not a small round high-accuracy result, it determines in step S1006 whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “1”. .

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1006 that the value of the round counter RC is “1”, the MPU 62 sets a special effect command in step S1007. Further, the MPU 62 transmits the special effect command set in step S1007 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
Here, if it is determined in step S1006 that the value of the round counter RC is “1”, the round game is the 15th round game (15R), that is, the last round game. Means.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the MPU 62 determines that the value of the round counter RC is “1” based on the special effect command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes the special effect process. . This special effect process will be described later in detail.

  The MPU 62 sets “15000” to the timer counter T in step S1008 after executing the process of step S1007 or when determining that the value of the round counter RC is not “1” in step S1006. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value every time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 seconds.

  After executing the process of step S1003 or step S1008, the MPU 62 executes an opening execution process of the special winning opening 38a in step S1009. In this opening execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open / close door 38b in an open state by executing drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the big prize opening process.

Note that the value set in the winning counter PC in step S1002 or step S1004 defines the upper limit of the total number of winning game balls to the big winning opening 38a.
The value set in the timer counter T in step S1003 or step S1008 defines the upper limit duration until the door 38b is set in the open state and then set in the closed state again. Therefore, as described above, the MPU 62 sets two types of upper limit durations having different lengths by setting “85” or “15000” to the timer counter T. Specifically, the MPU 62 includes a long-time mode (long-term mode) in which the upper-limit duration is set to 30 sec and a short-time mode (short-term mode) in which the upper-limit duration is set to 0.17 sec, which is shorter than that of the long-time mode. Aspect) is set.

Here, as described above, the pachinko machine 10 causes the game ball launching mechanism 81 to launch a game ball by exciting the solenoid of the game ball launching mechanism 81 at a period of 0.6 sec. Further, as described above, the MPU 62 sets “8” to the winning counter PC, thereby setting the upper limit of the total number of winning game balls to the big winning opening 38a to eight.
Accordingly, the upper limit duration of the long-time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total number of game balls to be awarded to the big winning opening 38a and the launch period of the game balls, so the upper limit of eight game balls It is easy to make a prize in the big prize opening 38a.
On the other hand, the upper limit duration in the short-time mode is shorter than the product of the upper limit of the total number of winning game balls to the big winning opening 38a and the launch period of the game balls (more specifically, the launch of the game balls). Therefore, it is difficult to win the game ball in the big prize opening 38a. Depending on the timing, it is possible to win about one game ball in the big prize opening 38a.

Returning to the description of the big prize opening / closing process, the processes after step S905 will be described with reference to FIG.
The MPU 62 sets the release command in step S905 after executing the special winning opening release process in step S904. Further, the MPU 62 transmits the release command set in step S905 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the special prize opening / closing process.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the open / close door 38b is set to the open state based on the open command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the special winning opening 38a is being opened in the step S901 (the process after the step S906) will be described.
In step S906, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the timer counter T is “0”. In other words, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the upper limit duration set in the timer counter T has elapsed in step S1003 or step S1008 of the special prize opening process.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is not “0”, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S907.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is “0”, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S918.

First, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the value of the timer counter T is not “0” in step S906 (process after step S907) will be described.
In step S907, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a winning to the big winning opening 38a has occurred. The determination as to whether or not a winning at the special winning opening 38a has occurred is executed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 50d corresponding to the special winning opening 38a.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S907 that no winning a prize winning opening 38a has occurred, the MPU 62 ends the winning prize opening / closing process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S907 that a winning at the big winning opening 38a has occurred, the MPU 62 updates the value of the winning counter PC by subtracting 1 in step S908.

In step S909, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is “0”.
If the MPU 62 determines that the value of the winning counter PC is not “0” in step S909, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening / closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the value of the winning counter PC is “0” in step S909, the MPU 62 executes a closing execution process in step S910. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open / close door 38b in the closed state by executing drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38c.

In step S911, the MPU 62 sets a close command. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the close command set in step S911 to the sound emission control device 90.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the open / close door 38b is set to the closed state based on the close command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S912, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the result is a “special outage result”.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S912 that the result is “special outage result”, the MPU 62 executes processing from step S923 described later.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S912 that the result is not “special loss result”, the MPU 62 executes processing in step S913 and subsequent steps.
In step S913, the MPU 62 updates the value of the round counter RC by subtracting 1 and determines in step S914 whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0”.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S914 that the value of the round counter RC is not “0”, the MPU 62 sets “500” as the value of the timer counter T in step S915. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the special prize opening / closing process.

  Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S915 is the waiting for opening until the opening / closing door 38b is set to the opened state again after the opening / closing door 38b is set to the opened state. Time is prescribed. In the present embodiment, the opening standby time is 1 sec. This open standby time is the same regardless of the type and progress of the open / close execution mode.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S914 that the value of the round counter RC is “0”, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S916.
In step S916, the MPU 62 sets “2000” as the ending standby time (standby period) in the timer counter T. As described above, the value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value every time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for ending is 4 sec. Note that the waiting time is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

The waiting time for ending is the same regardless of the type of game result, like the waiting time for opening. That is, the ending standby time is the same regardless of the type of opening / closing execution mode.
Note that the waiting time for ending is not limited to this. For example, the waiting time for ending may be slightly different depending on the type of game result to the extent that the player recognizes the same. In addition, for example, the waiting time for ending is greatly different between a game result of “low probability result” or “most advantageous result” and a game result other than these, etc. It is good also as a structure made to differ greatly according to the kind of.

In step S917, the MPU 62 sets an ending command. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the ending command set in step S917 to the sound emission control device 90. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the special prize opening / closing process.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes the end of the opening / closing execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, processing (processing after step S918) when it is determined in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is “0” in the MPU 62 will be described.
In step S918, the MPU 62 executes a closing execution process as in step S910 described above.
In step S919, the MPU 62 sets a close command as in step S911 described above.

In step S920, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the result is a “special loss result”.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S920 that the result is not “special loss result”, that is, if it is determined that the result is “big win”, the MPU 62 executes processing from step S921.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S920 that the result is “special outage result”, the MPU 62 executes processing in step S923 and subsequent steps.

First, the process (the process after step S921) when it is determined in step S920 that the result of the success / failure is not the “special loss result” by the MPU 62 will be described.
In step S921, the MPU 62 updates the value of the round counter RC by subtracting 1 from it.

In step S922, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0”.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S922 that the value of the round counter RC is not “0”, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S915 described above.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S922 that the value of the round counter RC is “0”, the MPU 62 executes the processing from S916 described above.

Next, processing (processing after step S923) when it is determined in step S912 or step S920 that the success / failure result is “special outage result” by the MPU 62 will be described.
In step S923, the MPU 62 updates the value of the open / close counter SOC by subtracting one.

In step S924, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the open / close counter SOC is “0”.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S924 that the value of the open / close counter SOC is not “0”, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S915 described above.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S924 that the value of the open / close counter SOC is “0”, the MPU 62 executes the processing from S916 described above.

Returning to the description of the gaming state transition processing, the processing after step S812 will be described with reference to FIG.
The MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the open / close counter SOC is “0” and the value of the round counter RC is “0” in step S812 after executing the big prize opening / closing process of step S811. .

If the MPU 62 determines in step S812 that at least one of the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not “0”, the MPU 62 ends the gaming state transition process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S812 that both the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are “0”, the value of the timer counter T is “0” in step S813. Is determined.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S813 that the value of the timer counter T is not “0”, the MPU 62 ends the gaming state transition process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S813 that the value of the timer counter T is “0”, the MPU 62 clears the open / close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64 in step S814, The migration process at the end of execution mode is executed. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the gaming state transition process.
Hereinafter, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode will be described in detail.

FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode.
In the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1112 as shown in FIG.
In step S <b> 1101, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is “the most advantageous result” or “the explicit small round high-accuracy result”.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is the “most advantageous result” or the “explicit small round high-accuracy result”, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1102.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the “most advantageous result” or the “explicit small round high-accuracy result”, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1105.

First, a process (process after step S1102) when it is determined in step S1101 that the distribution result is “the most advantageous result” or “an explicit small round high-accuracy result” in the MPU 62 will be described.
In step S1102, the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. If the high frequency support flag is already set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains this. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.

In step S1103, the MPU 62 clears the number limit flag stored in the RAM 64.
Here, when the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number of times limit flag is not set, the high frequency support mode is continued until at least “Big Winning” is selected in the lottery.

  In step S1104, the MPU 62 sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 64. If the high probability mode flag is already set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains this. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the success / failure lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high-probability mode continues until at least a “hit win” is made in the winning lottery. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode.

  Note that when the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is ended, the MPU 62 sets the flags (the low-accuracy result flag, the unspecified low-round high-accuracy result flag, the explicit low-round high) set in the RAM 64 according to the distribution result. Clear certain result flag and most advantageous result flag) and special outlier flag. In step S701 of the above-described change start process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the lottery mode is the high probability mode by determining whether or not the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 64. Yes.

Next, a description will be given of processing (step S1105 and subsequent steps) when it is determined in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the “most advantageous result” or “explicit small round high-accuracy result” in the MPU 62.
In step S1105, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is a “non-explicit small round high-accuracy result”.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the distribution result is the “inexplicit small round high-accuracy result”, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1106.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the distribution result is not the “inexplicitly small round high-accuracy result”, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1108 onward.

First, the processing (processing after step S1106) when it is determined in step S1105 that the distribution result is the “unspecified small round high-accuracy result” in the MPU 62 will be described.
In step S1106, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1106 that the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1103 described above.
In contrast, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1106 that the high frequency support flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 64 in step S1107. If the high probability mode flag is already set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains this. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the success / failure lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high-probability mode continues until at least a “hit win” is made in the winning lottery. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode.

Next, a process when the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the distribution result is not the “inexplicit small round high-accuracy result” (process after step S1108) will be described.
In step S1108, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is a “low probability result”.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1108 that the distribution result is not the “low probability result” (when the determination result is “special out-of-result”), the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode. To do.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1108 that the distribution result is the “low probability result”, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1109.

  In step S1109, the MPU 62 clears the high probability mode flag. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the success / failure lottery mode to the low probability mode. This low-probability mode is continued until at least a “big hit win” in the winning / losing lottery and the distribution result becomes other than the “low-probability result”.

In step S1110, the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. If the high frequency support flag is already set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains this. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S <b> 1111, the MPU 62 sets “100” to the value of the game number counter provided in the various counter areas 64 a of the RAM 64.
In step S1112, the MPU 62 sets a number limit flag in the RAM 64. If the number limit flag is already set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains this. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number-of-times limit flag is set, 100 games that are the end reference number set in the game number counter are set. Continue until digested. The MPU 62 clears the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times restriction flag when 100 game times have been consumed. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.
The MPU 62 executes these processes as a power combination support process in step S305 of the normal process, but detailed description thereof is omitted.

  In this way, if the winning / losing lottery results in a “big hit winning” and the sorting result in the sorting lottery is “most advantageous result” or “explicitly small round highly accurate result”, the gaming state is the current Regardless of the gaming state, after the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends, the mode shifts to the high probability mode and shifts to the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued until at least a “big win” is selected in the winning lottery.

  In addition, when the current support mode is the high-frequency support mode, if the winning lottery is "big win" and the distribution result is "unspecified small round high-accuracy result" The gaming state shifts to the high probability mode and shifts to the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued until at least a “big win” is selected in the winning lottery.

  On the other hand, when the current support mode is the low-frequency support mode, the winning lottery results in a “big win”, and the sorting result in the sorting lottery becomes an “inexplicit small round high-accuracy result” The game state shifts to the high probability mode and shifts to the low frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode (that is, the round number regulation mode) ends. The high-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode are continued until at least a “big hit win” is made in the winning lottery.

  In addition, when the winning / losing lottery is “big hit winning” and the sorting result is “low probability result” in the sorting lottery, the gaming state is the open / close execution mode (that is, regardless of the current gaming state) After completion of the round number regulation mode), the mode shifts to the low probability mode and shifts to the high frequency support mode. The low-probability mode will continue until at least “Big Winning” is selected in the winning lottery, and the high frequency support mode will be low if 100 game games are consumed without becoming “Big Winning” in the winning lottery. Enter frequency support mode.

  In addition, when the winning / losing lottery does not result in a “big hit winning”, that is, when the winning / failing result becomes a “special outage result” or “normal outage result”, the gaming state does not shift.

<Regarding the effect determination process executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 20 shows a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process in order to execute an effect for game times, an effect for an opening / closing execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 periodically executes steps S1201 to S1215 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) as shown in FIG.

In step S1201, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the change command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 are received.
If the MPU 92 determines that each command has not been received in step S1201, the MPU 92 executes the processing from step S1209 onward.
On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S1201 that each command has been received, in step S1202, based on the content of the type command, the game result is “the most advantageous result” or “low probability”. It is determined whether or not the result is “result”.

  If the MPU 92 determines in step S1202 that the game result is “the most advantageous result” or “the least probable result”, the MPU 92 executes a symbol determination process corresponding to the type of the game result in step S1203. In this symbol determination process, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is “the most advantageous result”, the same odd number or the same even number as the stop result to be finally stopped on the active line L. When the information related to the combination of symbols having numbers is determined and it is determined that the game result is a “low probability result”, the same even number is used as the stop result to be finally stopped on the active line L. Information related to the combination of symbols is determined. Note that odd and even numbers are randomly determined by lottery or the like.

On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S1202 that the game result is not “the most advantageous result” or “the least probable result”, in step S1204, based on the content of the type command, the game result is “ It is determined whether the result is a “normally off result”.
When the MPU 92 determines in step S1204 that the game result is not the “ordinary loss result”, that is, the game result is “special loss result”, “non-explicit small round high-accuracy result”, and “explicit small round high-accuracy result”. In any case, in step S1205, a common symbol determination process is executed. In this common symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines information related to a special symbol combination as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the active line L. Specifically, the MPU 92 is not a combination of symbols having the same number, but a special combination of symbols having different numbers that are not selected in the case of a “normally missed result” in the lottery determination (for example, “3 ・ 4 ・ 1”) is determined. This special symbol combination is the same regardless of the type of game result.

  On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines in step S1204 that the game result is the “normally lost result”, in step S1206, the MPU 92 executes a normally determined symbol determination process. In the normal determination symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines whether or not reach display occurs based on the contents of the variation command.

When the MPU 92 determines that reach display occurs, the MPU 92 determines information related to the combination of symbols for reach display as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the active line L. The combination of symbols for reach display is randomly determined by lottery or the like.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 92 displays information related to a combination of symbols different from the combination of the symbols described above as a stop result that is finally stopped on the active line L. decide. Specifically, the MPU 92 randomly determines a combination of symbols different from any of a combination of symbols having the same number, a special symbol combination, and a reach display symbol combination by lottery or the like.

  After executing any one of steps S1203, S1205, and S1206, the MPU 92 executes an effect pattern determination process in step S1207. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93. Specifically, the MPU 92 selects the production duration (production duration) and the content of the production as the production pattern. Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 based on the selected effect pattern. In step S1207, the MPU 92 also executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a notice display.

  In step S1208, the MPU 92 includes a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in any one of steps S1203, S1205, and S1206, and a pattern command including the effect pattern selected in step S1207. Is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100.

  Based on the stop result command and the pattern command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out a data table for executing the game-turn effect on the symbol display device 51 from the program ROM 103. The MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 51 executes an effect for game times based on the effect pattern selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90, and finally displays the stop result determined by the MPU 92 on the active line L. Stop display.

After executing the process of step S1208 or when determining that the change command and the type command are not received in step S1201, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S1209.
In step S1209, the MPU 92 determines whether an opening command has been received.

If the MPU 92 determines in step S1209 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processing from step S1213.
In contrast, if the MPU 92 determines in step S1209 that the opening command has been received, the MPU 92 determines the type of game result in step S1210 based on the contents of the opening command.

  In step S1211, the MPU 92 executes an effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the type of game result determined in step S1210. In the effect determination process for the opening / closing execution mode, if the MPU 92 determines in step S1210 that the game result is “special outage result” or “implicit small round high-accuracy result”, the MPU 92 is used for the opening / closing execution mode. Production A is selected as production. Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “explicit small round high-accuracy result”, the MPU 92 selects the effect B as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode.

  When the MPU 92 determines that the game result is “the most advantageous result”, the MPU 92 selects the effect C or the effect D as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, the MPU 92 has information about the combination of symbols having the same odd number as the stop result that the game result is the “most advantageous result” and is finally stopped and displayed on the active line L in step S1203. Is determined as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. On the other hand, the MPU 92 has information about the combination of symbols having the same even number as the stop result that the game result is “most advantageous result” and is finally stopped and displayed on the active line L in step S1203. Is determined as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode.

Further, when the MPU 92 determines that the game result is the “low probability result”, the MPU 92 selects the effect D as an effect for the opening / closing execution mode.
The duration time of the effects A and B corresponds to the time when the opening / closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode in the opening / closing execution mode. The duration time of the effects C and effects D corresponds to the time when the opening / closing of the special prize opening 38a is executed 15 times in a long time mode in the opening / closing execution mode.

  Further, in step S1211, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and the sound control of the speaker unit 24 based on the selection result of the effects A to D.

In step S <b> 1212, the MPU 92 transmits an opening / closing execution mode command including information related to the opening / closing execution mode effect selected in step S <b> 1211 to the display control device 100.
Based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out a data table for executing the effect for the opening / closing execution mode on the symbol display device 51 from the program ROM 103. The MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 51 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

Here, as described above, when it is determined that the value of the round counter RC is “1” in step S1006 of the special winning opening process (the distribution result is “the most advantageous result” or “the low probability result”). ), The MPU 62 transmits a special effect command to the sound emission control device 90.
Therefore, when the effect C or the effect D is selected as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode in step S1211, the display control apparatus 100 executes the special effect on the 15R based on the special effect command. Display control of the symbol display device 51 is executed so as to display an image for notifying the player. Note that the display control device 100 releases this image at a timing before the end of the 15th R.

After executing the process of step S1212 or when determining that the opening command has not been received in step S1209, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S1213.
In step S1213, the MPU 92 determines whether a special effect command has been received.

If the MPU 92 determines in step S1213 that the special effect command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processing from step S1215.
On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines that the special effect command is received in step S1213, the MPU 92 executes the special effect process in step S1214.
Hereinafter, the special effect process will be described in detail.

FIG. 21 shows a flowchart of the special effect process.
In the special effect process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1301 to S1307 as shown in FIG.
In step S1301, the MPU 92 executes an upper plate opening process. In the upper plate opening process, the MPU 92 sets the upper plate 401a to an open state by executing drive control of the plate driving unit 401c.
Here, as described above, when it is determined that the value of the round counter RC is “1” in step S1006 of the big prize opening process, the round game is the 15th round game (the 15Rth game) ), That is, the last round game. Further, since the lower plate 401b is set in a closed state, the game ball that has passed the right side of the nail 44a can enter the holding portion 401 by setting the upper plate 401a in an open state.

In the present embodiment, the MPU 92 sets the upper plate 401a to the open state only on the 15th eye so that the game ball that has passed the right side of the nail 44a can enter the holding portion 401. The upper plate 401a may be set to an open state at the 1R, and the upper plate 401a may be set to an open state at other timing such as an opening standby time or an ending standby time. Further, the upper plate 401a may be set in an open state a plurality of times during one opening / closing execution mode, and the upper plate 401a may be set in an open state a plurality of times during one round game.
In the present embodiment, the MPU 92 sets the upper plate 401a to the open state during the opening / closing execution mode, and allows the game ball that has passed the right side of the nail 44a to enter the holding unit 401. For example, the upper plate 401a may be set to the open state at another timing such as during the execution of the game times control process.

  In step S1302, the MPU 92 determines whether or not a game ball has entered the holding unit 401. Note that whether or not a ball has entered the holding unit 401 is determined based on the detection result of the detection sensor 50 h corresponding to the holding unit 401.

If the MPU 92 determines in step S1302 that a game ball has entered the holding unit 401, the MPU 92 executes processing in step S1303 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1302 that a game ball has not entered the holding unit 401, the processing from step S1306 is executed.

First, a process when the MPU 92 determines that a game ball has entered the holding unit 401 in step S1302 (process after step S1303) will be described.
In step S1303, the MPU 92 executes the upper plate closing process and sets the game ball holding flag in the RAM 94. In the upper plate closing process, the MPU 92 sets the upper plate 401a in a closed state by executing drive control of the plate driving unit 401c. Since the lower plate 401b is set in the closed state, the holding unit 401 can hold one game ball in the holding space by setting the upper plate 401a in the closed state.

  Here, the game ball holding flag is a flag for specifying whether or not a game ball has entered the holding unit 401. Specifically, when the game ball holding flag is set in the RAM 94, the MPU 92 specifies that the game ball is in the holding unit 401, and the game ball holding flag is not set in the RAM 94. In this case, it is specified that the game ball is not in the holding unit 401.

In step S1304, the MPU 92 executes a guide member rotation process. In this rotation process of the guide member, the MPU 92 sets the guide member 402d to either the upper entrance ball state or the lower entrance ball state by executing drive control of the guide member drive unit 402e.
Specifically, the MPU 92 sets the guide member 402d to the top entry state when the game result is the “most advantageous result”, and guides the guide member when the game result is the “low probability result”. 402d is set to the lower entry state.

  In the rotation process of the guide member, the MPU 92 executes the drive control of the guide member drive unit 402e to repeatedly set the guide member 402d in the upper entrance state and the lower entrance state, and then the next step S1305. If the game result is “the most advantageous result” before the game is executed, the guide member 402d is set to the top entry state, and if the game result is “the low probability result”, the guide member 402d is It may be set to the bottom entry state. According to this, the pachinko machine 10 can cause the player to expect that the game result is “the most advantageous result” in the sorting lottery even if the game result is “low probability result”. .

  In step S1305, the MPU 92 executes a lower plate opening / closing process. In the opening / closing process of the lower plate, the MPU 92 sets the lower plate 401b to the open state by executing drive control of the plate driving unit 401c, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the MPU 92 sets the lower plate 401b to the closed state again. Set. Then, the MPU 92 clears the game ball holding flag stored in the RAM 94. As a result, the holding unit 401 causes the information providing unit 402 to enter the game ball held in the holding space. Thereafter, the MPU 92 ends the special effect process.

  In this embodiment, the MPU 92 sets the lower plate 401b to an open state, and after a predetermined period has elapsed, sets the lower plate 401b to a closed state again, but the detection sensor corresponding to the holding unit 401 Based on the detection result of 50h, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the holding unit 401, and no game ball has entered the holding unit 401 (the game ball is dropped to the information adding unit 402). The lower plate 401b may be set to the closed state again when it is determined that the ball has entered the ball).

  In the present embodiment, the MPU 92 executes the lower plate opening / closing process immediately after performing the guide member rotation process in step S1304, and enters the game ball held in the holding unit 401 into the information adding unit 402. However, for example, the opening / closing process of the lower plate may be executed after the end of the 15th R, and the upper plate 401a is set to the open state so that the game ball can enter the holding unit 401. If later, the lower plate opening / closing process may be executed at other timing.

The game ball that has entered the information providing unit 402 enters the upper entrance 402b or the lower entrance 402c along the upper surface of the guide member 402d using the inclination of the guide member 402d.
Specifically, the game ball enters the upper entry port 402b when the guide member 402d is set in the upper entry state, that is, when the game result is “the most advantageous result”.
In contrast, when the guide member 402d is set in the lower entry state, that is, when the game result is a “low probability result”, the game ball enters the lower entry port 402c.

  Then, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the detection sensor 50i corresponding to the top entrance 402b has detected the entry of the game ball, and if it is determined that the game is detected, the game result is “the most advantageous result”. In order to notify the player that there has been, the most advantageous performance execution command is transmitted to the display control device 100. At this time, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and also performs sound control of the speaker unit 24. Then, the display control apparatus 100 performs an effect for the opening / closing execution mode in order to notify the player that the distribution result is “the most advantageous result” based on the most advantageous effect execution command transmitted from the MPU 92. The display control of the symbol display device 51 is executed so that the effect D is changed to the effect C.

  Further, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the detection sensor 50j corresponding to the lower entrance 402c detects the entry of the game ball. If the MPU 62 determines that the game ball has been detected, the game result is “low probability result”. In order to notify the player that there has been a low-definition effect execution command, the command is transmitted to the display control device 100. Then, the display control device 100 displays an image for notifying the player that the distribution result is the “low-accuracy result” based on the low-accuracy effect execution command transmitted from the MPU 92. Display control of the display device 51 is executed.

Next, a process when the MPU 92 determines that no game ball has entered the holding unit 401 in step S1302 (process after step S1306) will be described.
In step S1306, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the upper plate opening upper limit period of 10 seconds has elapsed. If the MPU 92 determines in step S1302 that 10 sec has not elapsed, the MPU 92 repeatedly executes the process of step S1302. If the MPU 92 determines in step S1302 that 10 seconds have elapsed, the MPU 92 executes the processing from step S1307.

  Here, the MPU 92 determines whether or not 10 sec has elapsed by counting the number of executions of the process of step S1302. For example, when the interval at which the process of step S1302 is repeatedly executed is 0.1 msec, the MPU 92 determines that 10 sec has elapsed when the number of executions of the process of step S1302 is counted and reaches 100,000. In the present embodiment, the MPU 92 sets the upper plate opening upper limit period to 10 sec, but may set it to a period other than this. Moreover, the structure which measures an upper plate open | release upper limit period is arbitrary, For example, you may measure an upper plate open | release upper limit period using a real-time clock.

  In step S1307, the MPU 92 executes a special effect end process. In this special effect end process, the MPU 92 sets the upper plate 401a in a closed state by executing drive control of the plate drive unit 401c, and also confirms that no game ball has entered the holding unit 401. In order to notify, the non-production execution command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. Then, the display control apparatus 100 displays a symbol display so as to display an image for notifying the player that the game ball is not in the holding unit 401 based on the non-effect execution command transmitted from the MPU 92. Display control of the device 51 is executed. Thereafter, the MPU 92 ends the special effect process.

Returning to the description of the effect determination process, the process after step S1215 will be described with reference to FIG.
MPU92 performs the process after step S1215 after performing the process of step S1214 or when it determines with not receiving the special effect command in step S1213.
In step S1215, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processes, the MPU 92 executes a process for advancing the effect for the opening / closing execution mode based on, for example, the opening command, the closing command, and the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62. Thereafter, the MPU 92 ends the effect determination process.

<Relationship between game results and game status>
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result and the game state based on the execution of various processes will be described.
FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between a game result and a game state or the like. Specifically, FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the relationship between the game result excluding “normally lost result” and the game state and the like, in which the game results are arranged in the column direction, and the game states and the like are arranged in the row direction.
As shown in FIG. 22, the pachinko machine 10, as a game result excluding “normally missed result”, results of “bonus winning” and “specially missed result”, “unspecified small round high-accuracy result”, “ It has a distribution result of “small round high accuracy result”, “most favorable result”, and “low accuracy result”.

Here, as shown in the second column of FIG. 22, the “special loss result” is a game result that is selected in the case of not winning “big win” (symbol “×” in the figure). In addition, the distribution result is a game result that is selected when a “big hit win” is selected (symbol “○” in the figure) in the winning / losing lottery.
Hereinafter, the relationship between the game result excluding the “normally lost result” and the game state will be described. In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the relationship between the gaming result and the gaming state as follows, but the combination of the gaming result and the gaming state, the contents of the gaming result, and The contents such as the game state are arbitrary.

In the “special loss result”, the opening / closing execution mode shifts to the opening / closing number regulation mode instead of the round number regulation mode, and the opening / closing of the special prize opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. In addition, in the “special loss result”, the success / failure lottery mode is not shifted.
In the “non-explicit small round high-accuracy result”, the opening / closing execution mode shifts to a round number regulation mode in which a round game is performed up to two times, and the opening / closing of the big prize opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. Is done. In addition, in the “non-explicit small round high-accuracy result”, the success / failure lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode.
As described above, the “special loss result” and the “non-explicit small round high-accuracy result” are different in that the opening / closing execution mode is different, but the opening / closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed twice in a short time mode. is doing.

  Further, in the “special loss result” and the “non-explicit small round high-accuracy result”, the stop result is a special symbol combination, and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is the effect A. Furthermore, the support mode does not shift in the “special out-of-range results” and “inexplicit small round high-accuracy results”. In addition, in the game times after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 51 does not display an image clearly indicating the high probability mode on the display screen G.

Therefore, it is not possible for the player to grasp whether the game result is the “special out-of-game result” or the “non-explicit small round high-accuracy result” by confirming the stop result or the effect for the opening / closing execution mode. Can not. In other words, the symbol display device 51 does not accept the lottery in the game round after the opening / closing execution mode ends even when the “non-explicit small round high-accuracy result” is obtained in the distribution lottery and the mode is shifted to the high probability mode. The mode is disguised as if it has not transitioned.
For this reason, the player can play a game while enjoying the prediction of whether or not the winning lottery mode has shifted to the high probability mode.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the “special loss result” functions as a first internal lottery result that is in a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player (the lottery lottery mode is not shifted).
In addition, the “non-explicit small round high-accuracy result” is a gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous gaming state that is shifted by the “special out-of-game result” (the lottery mode is shifted to the high probability mode). It functions as a second internal lottery result that is camouflaged as if it is an unfavorable gaming state.

In the “explicit small round high-accuracy result”, the opening / closing execution mode shifts to a round number regulation mode in which a round game is performed with the maximum number of times being twice, and the opening / closing of the special prize opening 38a is executed twice in a short time manner. The Further, in the “explicit small round high-accuracy result”, the win / fail lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode. In the “explicit small round high-accuracy result”, the stop result is a special symbol combination, and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is the effect B. In the “explicit small round high-accuracy result”, the support mode shifts to the high-frequency support mode. Furthermore, in the game times after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the symbol display device 51 displays an image clearly indicating the high probability mode on the display screen G.
Therefore, the player can grasp that the game result is the “explicit small round high-accuracy result” by confirming the stop result and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode.

In the “most advantageous result” and the “low probability result”, the opening / closing execution mode shifts to a round number regulation mode in which a round game is performed with the upper limit being 15 times, and the opening / closing of the special winning opening 38a is 15 in a long-time manner. Executed once.
Here, in the “most advantageous result”, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number or the same even number, and the lottery mode is shifted to the high probability mode and is used for the opening / closing execution mode. The production is production C or production D. Specifically, when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number, the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is effect C, and the combination of symbols having the same even number of stop results In this case, the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is effect D.
In addition, in the “low accuracy result”, the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, and the lottery mode is shifted to the low probability mode, and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is the effect D. Become. Furthermore, in the “most advantageous result” and the “low probability result”, the support mode shifts to the high frequency support mode.

  Therefore, the player can grasp that the game result is the “most advantageous result” when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same odd number. However, if the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the player confirms the stop result and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode, and the game result is “the most advantageous result”. It is impossible to grasp whether the result is “low accuracy result”.

  Here, even when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, when the game ball enters the holding unit 401, the player determines that the game result is “the most advantageous result. ”Or“ low-accuracy result ”. Specifically, when the game ball held by the holding unit 401 enters the upper entrance 402b, the player determines that the distribution result is “the most advantageous result” and the holding unit 401 When the held game ball enters the lower entrance port 402c, it can be grasped that the distribution result is the “low probability result”.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the upper entrance 402b functions as an advantageous entrance entrance that notifies the player that the game state is advantageous by detecting the entrance of the game ball to the player, The lower entrance 402c functions as a disadvantageous entrance that notifies the player that the game state is disadvantageous by detecting the entry of the game ball to the player.
In addition, on the right side of the top entrance 402b, characters of “probability change” are written, which means that the game mode shifts to the high probability mode when the game result is “the most advantageous result”. In addition, on the right side of the bottom entrance 402c, characters of “sorry”, which means that the game mode is changed to the low probability mode when the game result is “low probability result” (see FIG. 3), are described. .

  In addition, when the game ball enters the top entrance 402b, the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is changed from the effect D to the effect C, so that the player has the distribution result “the most advantageous result”. It can be grasped surely. Then, in the game times after the opening / closing execution mode ends, if the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is finally effect C, the symbol display device 51 displays an image clearly indicating the high probability mode on the display screen G. To do.

  On the other hand, if the game ball does not enter the holding unit 401, the player cannot grasp whether the game result is “the most advantageous result” or “the least probable result”. . Then, in the game times after the opening / closing execution mode ends, if the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is finally the effect D, the symbol display device 51 displays an image clearly indicating the high probability mode on the display screen G. do not do.

  Specifically, the symbol display device 51 does not display an image that clearly indicates the high probability mode on the display screen G. In the high frequency support mode, the number of game times is the reference end number of times (specifically, 100 When the number of times is reached, an image for informing the transition to the low frequency support mode is displayed on the display screen G. In other words, even in the case where “the most advantageous result” is obtained in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 51 finally produces the effect for the opening / closing execution mode in the game times after the opening / closing execution mode ends. If so, camouflaging is performed as if the game result was a “low probability result”.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the “low probability result” functions as a first internal lottery result that is in a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player (the winning lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode).
Further, the “most advantageous result” indicates that if the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is finally the effect D, the game state (win / fail lottery) that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous game state that shifts to the “low-accuracy result”. The mode shifts to a high probability mode), and functions as a second internal lottery result that is camouflaged as if it is an unfavorable gaming state.

If the distribution result is “the most advantageous result”, the symbol display device 51 is in the high probability mode after digesting 100 game times without becoming a “big win” in the winning lottery. An image clearly indicating this is displayed on the display screen G. In other words, the symbol display device 51 cancels the camouflage applied as if the game result was a “low probability result”.
As described above, when the game ball does not enter the holding unit 401, the game result is “the most advantageous result” and “low” until 100 game times are digested after the opening / closing execution mode ends. It is not possible to know which is the “probable result”.

Here, as described above, in the present embodiment, the big winning opening 38a is a ball entry means provided in the game area to allow the game ball to enter, and can receive a payout of the prize ball. It functions as an advantageous side entry means for giving an advantageous result to a player when entering a game ball.
In addition, the second out port 39b is a ball entry means provided in the game area for entering the game ball, and has a disadvantageous result that the payout of the prize ball cannot be received (at the big prize port 38a). It functions as a disadvantageous side entry means that gives the player a result that is more disadvantageous than the advantageous result that is given).

  Of the large number of nails 44 planted in the vicinity of the variable winning device 38, the nail 44a provided above the large winning port 38a and the second out port 39b holds the game ball in the large winning port 38a and the second winning port 38a. It functions as a distribution means for distributing and entering any of the out-ports 39b, and by switching and setting the first state and the second state, the game balls are distributed and input to the big winning port 38a. It is configured to be able to set a ratio of balls to be thrown and a ratio of game balls to be distributed to the second out ports 39b.

Therefore, if a large number of game balls are distributed to the big prize opening 38a by setting the nail 44a, it is advantageous for the player, and conversely, a large number of game balls can be distributed to the second out port 39b. This is disadvantageous for the player.
However, when the nail 44a is set so as to distribute a large number of game balls to the second out port 39b, it is disadvantageous for the player, and there is a problem that the player cannot play the game comfortably.

  On the other hand, when the nail 44a is set so as to distribute a lot of game balls to the special winning opening 38a, it is advantageous for the player, so that the player can play the game comfortably. However, if the nail 44a cannot be set so as to distribute a large number of game balls to the second out port 39b in order to make the player play a game comfortably, the degree of freedom of setting the nail 44a is reduced. There's a problem.

  In the present embodiment, the audio light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 cooperate with the game ball holding mechanism 40 when the game ball is distributed to the second out port 39b by the nail 44a. It functions as special effect execution means for executing effects. Therefore, when the nail 44a is set so as to distribute many game balls to the second out port 39b, the game is compared with the case where the nail 44a is set so as to distribute many game balls to the prize winning port 38a. The person can enjoy many productions.

According to the present embodiment as described above, the following operations and effects can be achieved.
(1) According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the voice light emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 allow the game ball holding mechanism 40 to be used when the game ball is distributed to the second out port 39b by the nail 44a. Since it functions as a special effect execution means for executing a special effect, the player is comfortable even when the nail 44a is set so as to distribute many game balls to the second out port 39b. You can play games. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player can comfortably play the game without reducing the degree of freedom of setting the nail 44a, and the player's attention to the game is improved. Can do.
(2) The nail 44a is set by switching between the first state and the second state, thereby distributing the game balls to the big winning opening 38a and entering the game balls into the second out port 39b. It is possible to set the ratio of entering and placing the ball. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the configuration of the distribution means can be simplified.

(3) The game ball holding mechanism 40 includes a holding unit 401 that holds a game ball, and an information adding unit 402 that gives information to a player using the game ball held by the holding unit 401. Therefore, the player first pays attention to whether or not the game ball is held in the holding unit 401, and then, in a stepwise manner, whether or not the game ball enters the upper entrance 402b in the information providing unit 402. You can pay attention to. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game in the opening / closing execution mode.
(4) Since the holding unit 401 is provided between the big winning opening 38a and the second out opening 39b, the player wins more than whether or not a game ball enters the second out opening 39b. It becomes easy to pay attention to whether or not a game ball enters the mouth 38a and the holding unit 401. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player can comfortably play the game without reducing the degree of freedom of setting the nail 44a, and the player's attention to the game is improved. Can do.

(5) According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even when the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the player has entered the holding unit 401 with a game ball. In this case, it is possible to grasp whether the game result is “the most advantageous result” or “the least probable result”. If the player does not enter the holding unit 401 with the game ball, the game result is “the most advantageous result” and “the least probable result” until 100 game times are consumed after the opening / closing execution mode ends. ”Cannot be grasped, so a great deal of attention will be paid to whether or not a game ball enters the holding unit 401. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game in the opening / closing execution mode.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment, and modifications, improvements, and the like within the scope that can achieve the object of the present invention are included in the present invention.
For example, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 includes a large winning opening 38a as an advantageous side entry means, a second out opening 39b as an unfavorable side entry means, and a nail 44a as a distribution means. It was. On the other hand, the advantage side entry means, the disadvantage side entry means, and the distribution means may be other than these. In short, the advantageous side entry means only needs to give the player an advantageous result when entering the game ball, and the disadvantageous side entry means is an advantageous result given by the advantageous side entry means. As long as it gives the player a more disadvantageous result than the game ball enters the game ball. The allocating means distributes the game balls to either the advantageous side entry means or the disadvantageous side entry means, and also distributes the game balls to the advantage side entry means to enter the ratio And the ratio of the game balls to be distributed to the disadvantageous side entry means and enter the balls. This also applies to other embodiments described later.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may include a lower operation port 37 as an advantageous side entry means and an upper operation port 36 as an adverse side entry means.
As described above, the first distribution table that is referred to when the jackpot type lottery is performed with respect to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning at the upper working port 36, and the lower working port 37 Comparing the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on winning with the second sort table referenced when the lottery type lottery is performed, the second sort table is more than the first sort table. Is advantageous to. Specifically, the second distribution table is more advantageous to the player than the first distribution table because the distribution result tends to be the “most advantageous result”.

  In view of this point, in the high-frequency support mode, the nail 44 is set so that the ratio of the number of game balls entering the lower operation port 37 to the number of game balls entering the upper operation port 36 during a predetermined period is increased. The more it is set, the more advantageous results are given to the player. Therefore, the lower operating port 37 functions as an advantageous side entrance means for giving an advantageous result to the player when entering the game ball, and the upper operating port 36 is given to the player at the lower operating port 37. It functions as a disadvantageous side entry means that gives a player a disadvantageous result rather than an advantageous result when the game ball enters.

In addition, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may include an upper operation port 36 as an advantageous side entrance means and a first out port 39a as an adverse side entrance means.
The upper operation port 36 functions as an advantageous side entry means for giving the player an advantageous result that the prize ball can be paid out when the game ball is entered, and the first out port 39a is an award. Functions as a disadvantageous side entry means to give a player a disadvantageous result that the ball cannot be paid out (a disadvantageous result than the advantageous result given at the upper operating port 36) to the player when the game ball enters is doing.

  In the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 performs a special effect by cooperating with the game ball holding mechanism 40 when the game balls are distributed to the second out port 39b by the nail 44a. Production execution means (the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100) were provided. On the other hand, the special effect type by the special effect execution means may be other than this. In short, the special effect execution means may be any means that executes a special effect when the game balls are distributed to the disadvantageous side entry means by the distribution means.

Specifically, for example, the special effect execution means is predetermined until the game times of 100 times after the end of the opening / closing execution mode that has been shifted when the game result is “the most advantageous result” or “the low probability result”. A special effect may be executed to release the camouflage by notifying the player whether the distribution result is the “most advantageous result” or the “low probability result”.
Further, for example, the special effect execution means, when the game result is “special out-of-game result” or “inexplicitly small round high-accuracy result”, the distribution result is “ A special effect for canceling the impersonation may be executed by notifying the player whether the result is “special loss result” or “non-explicit small round high-accuracy result”.

  In the present embodiment, the “special loss result” functions as a first internal lottery result that shifts to a gaming state that is unfavorable for the player, and the “non-explicit small round high-accuracy result” indicates “special loss result”. The game state is shifted to a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous game state that is shifted to, and functions as a second internal lottery result that is disguised as if the game state is unfavorable. Further, in the present embodiment, the “low probability result” functions as a first internal lottery result that shifts to a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, and the “most advantageous result” is the final effect for the opening / closing execution mode. In the case of production D, the game state shifts to a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous game state that shifts in the “low probability result”, and the second disguised as if the game state is disadvantageous. It functioned as an internal lottery result. On the other hand, the first internal lottery result and the second internal lottery result may be other than these.

  Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 10 has an opening / closing execution mode in which a round game is executed four times with a long duration upper limit duration, and an opening / closing execution mode in which a round game is executed 15 times with a long duration upper limit duration. The two opening / closing execution modes may be provided. Then, the opening / closing execution mode for executing the round game four times is caused to function as a first internal lottery result for shifting to a gaming state disadvantageous to the player, and the opening / closing execution mode for executing the round game 15 times is set to 4 round games. The game state shifts to a game state that is more advantageous for the player than the disadvantageous game state that is shifted in the open / close execution mode, and functions as a second internal lottery result that is disguised as if the game state is unfavorable. May be. In other words, even if it becomes the opening / closing execution mode in which the round game is executed 15 times in the internal lottery, the symbol display device 51 is disguised as if it is in the opening / closing execution mode in which the round game is executed 4 times in the internal lottery. May be applied. In this case, the special effect execution means notifies the player that the game is in the opening / closing execution mode in which the round game is executed 15 times at a predetermined timing in the opening / closing execution mode, and thereby the special effect is canceled. Should be executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the special effect execution means executes the special effect process only at the 15th eye, and the game ball that has entered the information adding unit 402 is placed in either the upper entrance 402b or the lower entrance 402c. I was allowed to enter. On the other hand, the special effect execution means executes the special effect process during the execution of other round games such as the 4R, 8R and 12R eyes in addition to the 15R, and the game result is “the most advantageous. In the case of “result”, the ball may enter the upper entrance 402b when executing any special effect process, and may enter the lower entrance 402c when executing the special effect process before that. . Note that the number of executions of the special effect process is determined according to, for example, a ratio of the number of game balls that have entered the disadvantage side entry means to the number of game balls that have entered the advantage side entry means during a predetermined period. be able to. And it can be determined at random by lottery etc. which special entrance processing is made to enter into the top entrance 402b.

In the present embodiment, the game ball holding mechanism 40 includes a holding unit 401 that holds a game ball, and an information adding unit 402 that gives information to a player using the game ball held by the holding unit 401. However, the player's attention to the game in the opening / closing execution mode is improved in two steps in a stepwise manner, but it may be one step or three or more steps.
Further, in the present embodiment, the holding portion 401 is provided between the special winning opening 38a and the second out opening 39b, but may be provided at a position other than this. In short, the game ball holding mechanism 40 only needs to be able to give information to the player using the game ball when the game ball is distributed to the second out port 39b by the nail 44a.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the information giving unit 402 has the upper entrance 402b, the lower entrance 402c, and the game balls that have entered the information giving unit 402 to the upper entrance 402b or the lower entrance 402c. Although the guide member 402d for guiding and the guide member driving unit 402e for driving the guide member 402d are provided, other configurations may be used. In short, the information providing unit only needs to be able to give information to the player.

  Specifically, for example, the information giving unit 402 has given information to the player using the game ball held by the holding unit 401, but the game ball that has entered the second out port 39b is used. Information may be given to the player by using it. In addition, for example, the information giving unit 402 gives information to the player by rotating the guide member 402d. However, the information giving unit 402 uses a display device such as a symbol display device 51, a segment display device, or a dot display device. Information may be given to the player by using it.

  Further, in the present embodiment, if the game ball does not enter the holding unit 401, the game result is “the most advantageous result” until 100 game times are consumed after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. It is impossible to grasp whether the result is “low accuracy result”. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 gives useful information to the player when the special performance is executed by the special performance execution means. On the other hand, a gaming machine may give a privilege when executing a special effect by the special effect executing means, and may not necessarily give useful information or a privilege to the player. In short, the special effect execution means may execute the special effect when the game balls are distributed to the disadvantageous side entry means by the distribution means.

Specifically, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 executes a special effect by the special effect execution means, the second allocation table with respect to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the upper working port 36. It may be configured to give a privilege to the player by setting to execute a lottery type lottery by referring to.
Here, as described above, the second distribution table is more advantageous to the player than the first distribution table because the distribution result tends to be the “most advantageous result”. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lower operation port 37 functions as an advantageous operation port in which an advantageous internal lottery is executed when the player enters the ball, and the upper operation port 36 enters the lower operation port 37. An internal lottery, which is more disadvantageous than an advantageous internal lottery executed with a ball as a trigger, functions as a disadvantageous operating port that is executed with a ball entering the ball as a trigger.

  Further, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 executes a special performance by the special performance execution means, the player is given a privilege by increasing the number of winning balls to be paid out when a ball is entered into various winning ports. It may be given.

[Second Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described are assigned the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 23 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the variable prize apparatus according to the second embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the gaming board 31 includes a variable winning device 38 provided on the lower right side of the gaming area, a second out port 39b provided on the right side of the variable winning device 38, a variable winning device 38, and And a game ball holding mechanism 40 provided between the second out ports 39b.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 23, the game board 31A includes a variable winning device 38 provided on the lower right side of the gaming area and a second winning device provided on the right side of the variable winning device 38. The game board 31 is different from the game board 31 in the first embodiment in that it includes an out port 39b and does not include the game ball holding mechanism 40. In other words, all the game balls that have passed the right side of the nail 44a enter the second out port 39b.

  In the present embodiment, the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100 execute processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the game state transition process, the big prize opening / closing process, the big prize opening opening process, and the effect determination process are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of each process in this embodiment will be described in order.

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the game state transition process.
In the gaming state transition process, the MPU 62 executes Steps S801 to S814 substantially similar to the first embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 24, the MPU 62 executes steps S815A to S817A after executing step S813 and before executing step S814, and performs other steps as in the first embodiment. Do the same. The processing of these steps S815A to S817A will be described in detail later.

  In step S801, the MPU 62 determines whether or not it is in the opening / closing execution mode. If the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S802. The processes after step S802 (steps S802 to S810) are the same as those in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S801 that it is in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes processing from step S811 onward.
In step S811, the MPU 62 executes a special winning opening / closing process.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special winning opening / closing process.
In the big prize opening / closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S901 to S924 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25, the MPU 62 executes steps S925A and S926A after executing step S906 and before executing step S907, and performs other steps as in the first embodiment. Do the same. The processing of these steps S925A and S926A will be described in detail later.

In step S901, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the special winning opening 38a is being opened.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the special winning opening 38a is not being opened, the MPU 62 executes processing in step S902 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the special winning opening 38a is being opened, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S906.

First, the processing (processing after step S902) when it is determined in step S901 that the MPU 62 does not open the special prize opening 38a will be described. The processing in steps S902 and S903 is the same as that in the first embodiment.
The MPU 62 determines that at least one of the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not “0” in step S902, and determines that the value of the timer counter T is “0” in step S903. If so, in step S904, a special winning opening opening process is executed.
Hereinafter, the special winning opening opening process in step S904 will be described in detail.

FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special winning opening opening process.
In the big prize opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1009 as shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the MPU 62 executes steps S1006A and S1007A instead of steps S1006 and S1007 in the first embodiment, and executes the other steps in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

In step S1006A, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “14”.
If the MPU 62 determines that the value of the round counter RC is “14” in step S1006A, the MPU 62 sets “0” to the value of the non-winning counter NPC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in step S1007A. Set (reset the value of the non-winning counter NPC). The non-winning counter NPC functions as a game ball counting unit that counts the game balls that have entered the second out port 39b as a disadvantageous side entry unit.
Here, if it is determined in step S1006A that the value of the round counter RC is “14”, it means that the round game is the second round game (2R round).

  In the present embodiment, the MPU 62 resets the value of the non-winning counter NPC before the start of the second round, but it may be reset at any timing, and the game that has entered the second out port 39b It may be reset just before counting the spheres. In other words, in this embodiment, the MPU 62 counts the game balls that have entered the second out port 39b in the 2R, but counts the game balls that have entered the second out port 39b in the 1R. Alternatively, the game balls that have entered the second out port 39b may be counted over a plurality of round games, or the game balls that have entered the second out port 39b at other timings may be counted. Good.

  After executing the process of step S1007A or when determining that the value of the round counter RC is not “14” in step S1006A, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1008. The processing after step S1008 is the same as that in the first embodiment.

Returning to the description of the big prize opening / closing process, the processes after step S905 will be described with reference to FIG.
The MPU 62 executes step S905 in the same manner as in the first embodiment after executing the special winning opening opening process in step S904. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the special prize opening / closing process.

Next, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the special winning opening 38a is being opened in the step S901 (the process after the step S906) will be described.
In step S906, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the timer counter T is “0”. In other words, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the upper limit duration set in the timer counter T has elapsed in step S1003 or step S1008 of the special prize opening process.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is not “0”, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S925A onward.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S906 that the value of the timer counter T is “0”, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S918. The processes after step S918 (steps S918 to S924) are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  In step S925A, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “14” (that is, whether or not it is the 2R round game), and whether or not the ball has entered the second out port 39b. It is determined whether or not it has occurred. Note that whether or not a ball has entered the second out port 39b is determined based on a detection result of the detection sensor 50g corresponding to the second out port 39b.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S925A that the value of the round counter RC is “14” and that a ball has entered the second out port 39b, the MPU 62 sets the value of the non-winning counter NPC in step S926A. Update by adding 1.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S925A that the value of the round counter RC is not “14”, or if it is determined that no ball has entered the second out port 39b, the MPU 62 performs step S907. The subsequent processing is executed. The processes after step S907 (steps S907 to S917) are the same as those in the first embodiment.

Returning to the description of the gaming state transition processing, the processing after step S812 will be described with reference to FIG. The processing in steps S812 and S813 is the same as that in the first embodiment.
The MPU 62 determines that both the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are “0” in step S812, and determines that the value of the timer counter T is “0” in step S813. In Step S815A, it is determined whether or not the value of the non-winning counter NPC is 2 or more. In other words, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the number of game balls that have entered the second out port 39b during the 2R round game is two or more.

If the MPU 62 determines that the value of the non-winning counter NPC is 2 or more in step S815A, the MPU 62 sets a special effect command in step S816A. Further, the MPU 62 transmits the special effect command set in step S816A to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the value of the non-winning counter NPC is determined to be 2 or more by the MPU 62 based on the special effect command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. . This process will be described in detail later.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S815A that the value of the non-winning counter NPC is not 2 or more, the MPU 62 sets a non-special effect command in step S817A. Further, the MPU 62 transmits the non-special effect command set in Step S817A to the sound emission control device 90 in Step S301 of the normal process.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the MPU 62 determines that the value of the non-winning counter NPC is not 2 or more based on the non-special effect command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes predetermined processing. . This process will be described in detail later.

  After executing the process of step S816A or step S817A, the MPU 62 executes a transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in step S814. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the gaming state transition process. Note that the processing in step S814 is the same as that in the first embodiment.

<Regarding the effect determination process executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 27 shows a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process in order to execute an effect for game times, an effect for an opening / closing execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 periodically executes steps S1201 to S1215 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) as shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the MPU 92 executes Steps S1212A to S1214A instead of Steps S1212 to S1214 in the first embodiment, and executes the other steps as in the first embodiment.

In step S <b> 1212 </ b> A, the MPU 92 transmits an opening / closing execution mode command including information related to the effect for the opening / closing execution mode determined in step S <b> 1211 to the display control apparatus 100.
Based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out a data table for executing the effect for the opening / closing execution mode on the symbol display device 51 from the program ROM 103. The MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 51 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode determined by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

Here, as described above, when it is determined that the value of the round counter RC is “14” in step S1006A of the big prize opening process (the distribution result is “the most advantageous result” or “the low probability result”). ), The MPU 62 determines whether or not a ball has entered the second out port 39b during the 2R round game. If the number of game balls that have entered the second out port 39b during the 2R round game is two or more, the MPU 62 transmits a special effect command to the sound emission control device 90 in step S816A. To do.
Therefore, when the effect D is selected as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode in step S1211, the display control apparatus 100 causes two or more game balls to enter the second out port 39b in the 2R round game. Display control of the symbol display device 51 is executed so as to display an image for notifying the player that it should be. The display control apparatus 100 releases this image at the latest before the start of the 3R round game.

After executing the process of step S1212A or when determining that the opening command has not been received in step S1209, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S1213A.
In step S1213A, the MPU 92 determines whether or not a special effect command has been received. Specifically, the MPU 92 determines whether or not a special effect command, either a special effect command or a non-special effect command, has been received. Here, the special effect command is sent to the second out port 39b when the MPU 62 determines that the value of the non-winning counter NPC is 2 or more in step S815A of the game state transition process, that is, in the 2R round game. When the number of entered game balls is two or more, it is transmitted from the MPU 62. The non-special effect command is transmitted from the MPU 62 when the MPU 62 determines that the value of the non-winning counter NPC is not 2 or more in step S815A of the gaming state transition process.

  If the MPU 92 determines in step S1213A that a special effect command has been received, the MPU 92 executes special effect result notification processing in step S1214A. In this special effect result notification process, the MPU 92 has entered the second out port 39b during the 2R round game based on which special effect command or special effect command is received. It is notified whether or not the number of spheres is two or more. In addition, when the number of game balls that have entered the second out port 39b during the 2R round game is two or more, the MPU 92 determines that the distribution result is “most advantageous” based on the contents of the type command. The player is notified of whether the result is “result” or “low probability result”.

  Specifically, if the MPU 92 determines in step S1213A that the special effect command has been received, the distribution result is “the most advantageous result” and “the low probability result” based on the content of the type command. And whether or not the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is effect D.

  When the MPU 92 determines that the distribution result is “the most advantageous result” and determines that the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is the production D, the distribution result is “the most advantageous result”. Is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100 to notify the player of the most advantageous performance execution command. At this time, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and also performs sound control of the speaker unit 24. Then, the display control device 100 changes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode from the effect D to the effect C in order to notify the player that the distribution result is “the most advantageous result”. Execute display control.

  In addition, when the MPU 92 determines that the distribution result is the “low probability result”, the MPU 92 notifies the player that the distribution result is the “low probability result”. Is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. Then, the display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 51 so as to display an image for notifying the player that the distribution result is the “low probability result”.

  On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines that the non-special effect command has been received in step S1213A, the number of game balls that have entered the second out port 39b during the 2R round game is two. In order to notify the player that the above is not true, a non-effect execution command is transmitted to the display control device 100. The display control apparatus 100 displays an image for notifying the player that the number of game balls that have entered the second out port 39b during the 2R round game is not two or more. Display control of the display device 51 is executed. Then, in the game times after the opening / closing execution mode ends, if the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is finally the effect D, the symbol display device 51 displays an image clearly indicating the high probability mode on the display screen G. do not do.

  Specifically, the symbol display device 51 does not display an image that clearly indicates the high probability mode on the display screen G. In the high frequency support mode, the number of game times is the reference end number of times (specifically, 100 When the number of times is reached, an image for informing the transition to the low frequency support mode is displayed on the display screen G. In other words, even in the case where “the most advantageous result” is obtained in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 51 finally produces the effect for the opening / closing execution mode in the game times after the opening / closing execution mode ends. If so, camouflaging is performed as if the game result was a “low probability result”.

If the distribution result is “the most advantageous result”, the symbol display device 51 is in the high probability mode after digesting 100 game times without becoming a “big win” in the winning lottery. An image clearly indicating this is displayed on the display screen G. In other words, the symbol display device 51 cancels the camouflage applied as if the game result was a “low probability result”.
In this way, if the number of game balls that have entered the second out port 39b in the 2R round game is not two or more, the player can play 100 games after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. It is impossible to grasp whether the game result is the “most advantageous result” or the “low probability result” until the game is completed.

  MPU92 performs the process after step S1215, after performing the process of step S1214A or when it determines with not receiving the command for special effect in step S1213A. The processing after step S1215 is the same as that in the first embodiment.

  Here, when the MPU 62 determines that the value of the non-winning counter NPC is 2 or more at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 transmits a special effect command to the sound emission control device 90 in step S816A of the gaming state transition process. To do. If the MPU 92 determines that a special effect command has been received, the MPU 92 executes a special effect result notification process in step S1214A.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 give a special effect when the number of game balls counted in the predetermined period by the non-winning counter NPC is larger than the predetermined number. It functions as a special effect execution means to be executed. In the present embodiment, the MPU 62 sends a special effect command to the sound emission control device 90 when it is determined that the number of game balls that have entered the second out port 39b during the 2R round game is two or more. Although it was transmitted, there may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  Here, as described above, in the distribution result of “the most advantageous result” and “the least probable result”, the open / close execution mode shifts to the round number regulation mode in which the round game is performed with the upper limit number of 15 times. Opening and closing of the winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in a long-time manner. Further, the MPU 62 sets “8” to the winning counter PC in step S1004 of the winning a prize opening process, thereby increasing the upper limit of the total number of game balls to be awarded to the winning prize opening 38a in one round game. It stipulates in pieces. Since the upper limit duration of the long-time mode is sufficiently longer than the product of the upper limit of the total number of game balls to be awarded to the special winning opening 38a and the launch period of the game balls, the upper limit for one round game is the upper limit. It is easy to win 8 game balls in the big prize opening 38a. Therefore, it can be assumed that the number of game balls entering the big prize opening 38a in the round game of the 2R is eight.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the special effect execution means is counted in the predetermined period by the non-winning counter NPC before the number of game balls counted in the predetermined period by the winning counter PC reaches eight. When the number of game balls is larger than a predetermined number, a special effect is executed. In other words, in the present embodiment, the special effect execution means has the number of game balls counted in the predetermined period by the non-winning counter NPC with respect to the number of game balls counted in the predetermined period by the winning counter PC. Special effects are performed according to the ratio.

According to the present embodiment as described above, the following operations and effects can be achieved.
(1) The main control device 60 includes a non-winning counter NPC as a game ball counting means for counting game balls that have entered the second out port 39b, and the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 are non-winning. When the number of game balls counted in the predetermined period by the counter NPC is larger than the predetermined number, the counter NPC functions as a special effect executing means for executing a special effect. Therefore, when the nail 44a is set so as to distribute many game balls to the second out port 39b, the game is compared with the case where the nail 44a is set so as to distribute many game balls to the prize winning port 38a. The person can enjoy many productions. In other words, even when the nail 44a is set so as to distribute a large number of game balls to the second out port 39b, the player can play the game comfortably. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player can comfortably play the game without reducing the degree of freedom of setting the nail 44a, and the player's attention to the game is improved. Can do.
(2) The nail 44a is set by switching between the first state and the second state, thereby distributing the game balls to the big winning opening 38a and entering the game balls into the second out port 39b. It is possible to set the ratio of entering and placing the ball. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the configuration of the distribution means can be simplified.

(3) According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, even if the stop result is a combination of symbols having the same even number, the player will have the second out mouth in the 2R round game. If the number of game balls that have entered the ball 39b is two or more, it is possible to grasp whether the game result is the “most advantageous result” or the “low probability result”. In addition, if the number of game balls that have entered the second out port 39b during the 2R round game is not two or more, the game results until the player completes 100 game times after the opening / closing execution mode ends. It is impossible to grasp whether the result is “the most advantageous result” or “the least probable result”, so that the number of game balls that have entered the second out port 39b in the 2R round game is two or more. We will pay much attention to whether or not. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game in the opening / closing execution mode.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment, and modifications, improvements, and the like within the scope that can achieve the object of the present invention are included in the present invention.
For example, in the present embodiment, the main control device 60 includes a non-winning counter NPC as a game ball counting means for counting game balls that have entered the second out port 39b, and the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. Has functioned as special effect execution means for executing a special effect when the number of game balls counted in the predetermined period by the non-winning counter NPC is larger than the predetermined number.

  On the other hand, for example, the number of game balls that have entered the second out port 39b as the disadvantageous side entry means is counted, and the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 38a as the advantage side entry means is counted. The game ball counting means is configured as described above, and the special effect executing means enters the second out port 39b for the number of game balls that have entered the big winning port 38a counted in a predetermined period by the game ball counting unit. You may comprise so that a special effect may be performed according to the ratio of the number of the game balls which were balled. In short, the special effect executing means executes the special effect when the number of the game balls that have entered the disadvantage-side entrance means counted in the predetermined period by the game ball counting means is larger than the predetermined number. What is necessary is just to comprise. This also applies to a third embodiment described later.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 determines that the distribution result is “most advantageous result” and “when the number of game balls counted in the predetermined period by the non-winning counter NPC is larger than the predetermined number. It was provided with special effect execution means (the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100) for executing a special effect for canceling the camouflage by notifying the player of which the result was “low probability result”. On the other hand, conditions for executing a special effect by the special effect executing means and types of special effects by the special effect executing means may be other than this. In short, the special effect executing means executes the special effect when the number of the game balls that have entered the disadvantage-side entrance means counted in the predetermined period by the game ball counting means is larger than the predetermined number. Anything is acceptable.

  Specifically, for example, the special effect execution means is predetermined until the game times of 100 times after the end of the opening / closing execution mode that has been shifted when the game result is “the most advantageous result” or “the low probability result”. When the ratio of the number of game balls entering the upper operation port 36 to the number of game balls entering the lower operation port 37 during the period is higher than a predetermined ratio, the distribution result is “the most advantageous result”. Also, a special effect for canceling the camouflage may be executed by notifying the player of which of the “low-accuracy results”.

  In addition, for example, the special effect execution means, during a predetermined period after the end of the opening / closing execution mode when the game result is “special outage result” or “non-explicit small round high-accuracy result”, When the ratio of the number of game balls that have entered the first out port 39a to the number of game balls that have entered the ball is higher than a predetermined ratio, the distribution result is “special outage result” and “unspecified small round height” A special effect of canceling the camouflage may be executed by notifying the player of which the “probable result” was.

  In the present embodiment, the “special loss result” functions as a first internal lottery result that shifts to a gaming state that is unfavorable for the player, and the “non-explicit small round high-accuracy result” indicates “special loss result”. The game state is shifted to a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous game state that is shifted to, and functions as a second internal lottery result that is disguised as if the game state is unfavorable. Further, in the present embodiment, the “low probability result” functions as a first internal lottery result that shifts to a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, and the “most advantageous result” is the final effect for the opening / closing execution mode. In the case of production D, the game state shifts to a game state that is more advantageous to the player than the disadvantageous game state that shifts in the “low probability result”, and the second disguised as if the game state is disadvantageous. It functioned as an internal lottery result. On the other hand, the first internal lottery result and the second internal lottery result may be other than these.

  Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 10 has an opening / closing execution mode in which a round game is executed four times with a long duration upper limit duration, and an opening / closing execution mode in which a round game is executed 15 times with a long duration upper limit duration. The two opening / closing execution modes may be provided. Then, the opening / closing execution mode for executing the round game four times is caused to function as a first internal lottery result for shifting to a gaming state disadvantageous to the player, and the opening / closing execution mode for executing the round game 15 times is set to 4 round games. The game state shifts to a game state that is more advantageous for the player than the disadvantageous game state that is shifted in the open / close execution mode, and functions as a second internal lottery result that is disguised as if the game state is unfavorable. May be. In other words, even if it becomes the opening / closing execution mode in which the round game is executed 15 times in the internal lottery, the symbol display device 51 is disguised as if it is in the opening / closing execution mode in which the round game is executed 4 times in the internal lottery. May be applied. In this case, the special effect execution means notifies the player that the game is in the opening / closing execution mode in which the round game is executed 15 times at a predetermined timing in the opening / closing execution mode, and thereby the special effect is canceled. Should be executed.

  Further, in this embodiment, if the number of game balls that have entered the second out port 39b in the 2R round game is not two or more, the player plays 100 game times after the opening / closing execution mode ends. It is impossible to grasp whether the game result is the “most advantageous result” or the “low probability result” until the game is completed. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 gives useful information to the player when the special performance is executed by the special performance execution means. On the other hand, a gaming machine may give a privilege when executing a special effect by the special effect executing means, and may not necessarily give useful information or a privilege to the player. In short, the special effect execution means executes the special effect when the number of game balls that have entered the disadvantage-side entry means counted during the predetermined period by the game ball counting means is larger than the predetermined number. That's fine.

Specifically, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 executes a special effect by the special effect execution means, the second allocation table with respect to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the upper working port 36. It may be configured to give a privilege to the player by setting to execute a lottery type lottery by referring to.
Here, as described above, the second distribution table is more advantageous to the player than the first distribution table because the distribution result tends to be the “most advantageous result”. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lower operation port 37 functions as an advantageous operation port in which an advantageous internal lottery is executed when the player enters the ball, and the upper operation port 36 enters the lower operation port 37. An internal lottery, which is more disadvantageous than an advantageous internal lottery executed with a ball as a trigger, functions as a disadvantageous operating port that is executed with a ball entering the ball as a trigger.

  Further, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 executes a special performance by the special performance execution means, the player is given a privilege by increasing the number of winning balls to be paid out when a ball is entered into various winning ports. It may be given.

[Third Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a third embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described are assigned the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 28 is an enlarged view of a cross section of the upper working port according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
In the second embodiment, the game board 31A has the upper operation port 36 provided in the opening of the game area.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, the game board 31B has an upper operation port 36B provided in the opening of the game area, and the upper operation port 36B is the second operation port. The game board 31A is different from the game board 31A in the second embodiment in that the configuration differs from the upper operation port 36 in the embodiment.

  The upper operation port 36B is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape that opens upward so that a game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and guides the game ball that has entered the upper operation port 36B to the opening. Has a passage 36B1 formed on the back side. The upper operating port 36B is configured to detect a winning ball passing portion 36B2 formed at a position where the gaming ball that has passed through the passage 36B1 always passes, and the aforementioned detection sensor 50b that detects the gaming ball passing through the winning ball passing portion 36B2. And. Further, the upper working port 36B is provided with a bottom opening / closing door 36B3 which is provided so as to be freely opened and closed and forms a bottom surface portion by closing.

  The bottom opening / closing door 36B3 is connected to a bottom surface driving unit 36B4 mounted on the back side of the game board 31B. The bottom opening / closing door 36B3 is set to either a closed state or an open state by being driven by the bottom surface driving unit 36B4. In the closed state, the bottom opening / closing door 36B3 is closed to form the bottom surface portion of the upper operation port 36B, whereby the game ball that has entered the opening of the upper operation port 36B is guided to the winning passage portion 36B2 (FIG. Solid line position). In the open state, the bottom opening / closing door 36B3 is opened and the bottom surface portion of the upper working port 36B is removed, so that the game ball that has entered the opening of the upper working port 36B falls and enters the lower working port 37. (The position of the two-dot chain line in the figure).

Accordingly, a game ball that has entered the opening of the upper working port 36B wins the upper working port 36B when the bottom opening / closing door 36B3 is set in the closed state, and when the bottom opening / closing door 36B3 is set in the open state. Wins the lower working port 37.
The upper working port 36B is different from the upper working port 36 in the second embodiment only in that the bottom working door 36B3 and the bottom driving unit 36B4 are provided.

  In the present embodiment, the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100 execute processing different from that in the second embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the game state transition process and the effect determination process are different from those in the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of each process in this embodiment will be described in order.

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 29 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the game state transition process.
In the gaming state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S801 to S814 as in the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the MPU 62 executes steps S816B and S817B instead of steps S816A and S817A in the second embodiment, and executes the other steps in the same manner as in the second embodiment.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S815A that the value of the non-winning counter NPC is 2 or more, the MPU 62 sets a special effect command and sets the bottom face release flag in the RAM 64 in step S816B. Further, the MPU 62 transmits the special effect command set in step S816B to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the value of the non-winning counter NPC is determined to be 2 or more by the MPU 62 based on the special effect command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. . This process will be described in detail later.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S815A that the value of the non-winning counter NPC is not 2 or more, in step S817B, the MPU 62 sets a non-special effect command and stores the bottom face opening flag stored in the RAM 64. To clear. Further, the MPU 62 transmits the non-special effect command set in step S817B to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the MPU 62 determines that the value of the non-winning counter NPC is not 2 or more based on the non-special effect command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes predetermined processing. . This process will be described in detail later.

Here, the bottom surface opening flag is a flag for defining whether the bottom surface opening / closing door 36B3 is set to a closed state or an open state.
Specifically, when the bottom opening flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 sets the bottom opening / closing door 36B3 to the open state by executing drive control of the bottom driving unit 36B4.
On the other hand, when the bottom opening flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 sets the bottom opening / closing door 36B3 in a closed state by executing drive control of the bottom driving unit 36B4.
Note that the MPU 62 sets the bottom face opening flag together with the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times restriction flag when the game result is 100 times after completion of the opening / closing execution mode when the game result is “low probability result”. clear.

  Therefore, the number of game balls that have entered the second out port 39b in the MPR 62 in the 2R round game in the opening / closing execution mode that is shifted when the game result is the “most advantageous result” or the “low probability result” is 2. If it is more than the number, the bottom opening / closing door 36B3 is set to the open state only when the high-frequency support mode that has been shifted to after the opening / closing execution mode is continued.

<Regarding the effect determination process executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 30 shows a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process in order to execute an effect for game times, an effect for an opening / closing execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 periodically executes steps S1201 to S1215 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) as shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the MPU 62 executes step S1214B instead of step S1214A in the second embodiment, and executes the other steps in the same manner as in the second embodiment.

  In step S1214B, the MPU 92 executes a special effect result notification process. In this special effect result notification process, the MPU 92 has entered the second out port 39b during the 2R round game based on which special effect command or special effect command is received. It is notified whether or not the number of spheres is two or more. In addition, when the number of game balls that have entered the second out port 39b during the 2R round game is two or more, the MPU 92 determines that the distribution result is “most advantageous” based on the contents of the type command. The player is notified of whether the result is “result” or “low probability result”.

  Specifically, if the MPU 92 determines in step S1213A that the special effect command has been received, the distribution result is “the most advantageous result” and “the low probability result” based on the content of the type command. And whether or not the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is effect D.

  When the MPU 92 determines that the distribution result is “the most advantageous result” and determines that the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is the production D, the distribution result is “the most advantageous result”. Is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100 to notify the player of the most advantageous performance execution command. At this time, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and also performs sound control of the speaker unit 24. Then, the display control device 100 changes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode from the effect D to the effect C in order to notify the player that the distribution result is “the most advantageous result”. Execute display control.

  In addition, when the MPU 92 determines that the distribution result is the “low probability result”, the MPU 92 notifies the player that the distribution result is the “low probability result”. Is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. Then, the display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 51 so as to display an image for notifying the player that the distribution result is the “low probability result”.

  Further, the MPU 92 is irrelevant to the determination result of whether the distribution result is the “most advantageous result” or the “low-accuracy result”, and whether the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is the effect D. In order to notify the player that the bottom surface opening / closing door 36B3 is set to the open state only when the high-frequency support mode that has been shifted to after the opening / closing execution mode is continued, the bottom surface opening execution command is displayed and controlled. Transmit to device 100. At this time, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and also performs sound control of the speaker unit 24. The display control device 100 then notifies the player that the bottom opening / closing door 36B3 is set to the open state only when the high-frequency support mode that has been shifted to after the opening / closing execution mode is continued. The display control of the symbol display device 51 is executed so as to display.

  On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines that the non-special effect command has been received in step S1213A, the number of game balls that have entered the second out port 39b during the 2R round game is two. In order to notify the player that the above is not true, a non-effect execution command is transmitted to the display control device 100. The display control apparatus 100 displays an image for notifying the player that the number of game balls that have entered the second out port 39b during the 2R round game is not two or more. Display control of the display device 51 is executed. Then, in the game times after the opening / closing execution mode ends, if the effect for the opening / closing execution mode is finally the effect D, the symbol display device 51 displays an image clearly indicating the high probability mode on the display screen G. do not do.

  Specifically, the symbol display device 51 does not display an image that clearly indicates the high probability mode on the display screen G. In the high frequency support mode, the number of game times is the reference end number of times (specifically, 100 When the number of times is reached, an image for informing the transition to the low frequency support mode is displayed on the display screen G. In other words, even in the case where “the most advantageous result” is obtained in the distribution lottery, the symbol display device 51 finally produces the effect for the opening / closing execution mode in the game times after the opening / closing execution mode ends. If so, camouflaging is performed as if the game result was a “low probability result”.

If the distribution result is “the most advantageous result”, the symbol display device 51 is in the high probability mode after digesting 100 game times without becoming a “big win” in the winning lottery. An image clearly indicating this is displayed on the display screen G. In other words, the symbol display device 51 cancels the camouflage applied as if the game result was a “low probability result”.
In this way, if the number of game balls that have entered the second out port 39b in the 2R round game is not two or more, the player can play 100 games after the end of the opening / closing execution mode. It is impossible to grasp whether the game result is the “most advantageous result” or the “low probability result” until the game is completed.

  Here, as described above, in the high frequency support mode, the game ball is likely to win the lower operation port 37 in comparison with the low frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability that the game ball will win the upper operation port 36 than the lower operation port 37. Further, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball wins the lower operation port 37 is higher than the upper operation port 36. When a winning to the lower operating port 37 is detected, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the game balls so much. It can be carried out.

  Further, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines that there is the holding information stored in the second result display holding area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operating opening 37, the upper operating opening Priority is given to the holding information stored in the second result display area holding area Rb regardless of whether there is holding information stored in the first result display area holding area Ra based on the winning of the game ball to 36B Therefore, it is set for digestion of game times.

  Further, as described above, the first distribution table that is referred to when the jackpot type lottery is performed on the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on the winning to the upper working port 36B, and the lower working port 37 Comparing the value of the jackpot type counter C2 based on winning with the second sort table referenced when the lottery type lottery is performed, the second sort table is more than the first sort table. Is advantageous to. Specifically, the second distribution table is more advantageous to the player than the first distribution table because the distribution result tends to be the “most advantageous result”.

Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player must digest the game times based only on the hold information stored in the second result display holding area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the lower working port 37. I expect to play games.
However, when the speed at which the game ball wins the lower working port 37 is slower than the speed at which the game times are digested based on the winning of the game ball to the lower working port 37, the high frequency support mode is set. Nevertheless, since the game times will be digested by the hold information stored in the first result display holding area Ra based on the winning of the game ball to the upper working port 36B, You will not be able to play comfortably.

On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the value of the non-winning counter NPC is 2 or more at the end of the opening / closing execution mode (in other words, the game that entered the second out port 39b during the 2R round game) If it is determined that the number of balls is two or more), the bottom face release flag is set in the RAM 64 in step S816B of the gaming state transition process. When the bottom opening flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 sets the bottom opening / closing door 36B3 to the open state by executing drive control of the bottom driving unit 36B4.
The game ball that has entered the opening of the upper working port 36B wins the lower working port 37 when the bottom opening / closing door 36B3 is set to the open state. According to this, the player can digest game times based only on the hold information stored in the second result display holding area Rb based on the winning of the game ball to the lower working port 37. , You can play comfortably.

  Here, in the said 1st Embodiment and the said 2nd Embodiment, when the game machine performed a special effect in a special effect execution means, it provided the player with useful information. Specifically, the player can grasp whether the game result is “the most advantageous result” or “the least probable result” without digesting 100 game times after the opening / closing execution mode ends. It was given useful information that it can.

  However, the player can finally grasp whether the game result is “the most advantageous result” or “the least probable result” by digesting 100 game times after the opening / closing execution mode ends. . In other words, in the first embodiment and the second embodiment, when the gaming machine executes a special effect by the special effect executing means, the game machine gives the player useful information directly. Is not granted a profit.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 sets the bottom opening / closing door 36B3 in an open state when executing a special effect by the special effect executing means, and therefore enters the opening of the upper working port 36B. The game balls that have been balled will win a prize in the lower working port 37. Therefore, even if the speed at which the game ball wins the lower operation port 37 is slower than the speed at which the game times are digested based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation port 37, the player Based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation port 37, the game times can be digested only by the holding information stored in the holding area Rb for the second result display section.

  In other words, the MPU 62 executes the lottery type lottery by referring only to the second distribution table that is more advantageous for the player than the first distribution table because the distribution result is likely to be the “most advantageous result”. become. That is, in this embodiment, the gaming machine gives a direct profit (privilege) to the player when the special effect is executed by the special effect executing means.

In this embodiment as well, the same actions and effects as those of the second embodiment can be obtained, and the following actions and effects can be obtained.
(1) Since the pachinko machine 10 gives a special privilege to the player when the special production is executed by the special production execution means, the player can enter the second out port 39b during the 2R round game. Attention will be paid to whether or not the number of game balls entered is two or more. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player's attention to the game during the opening / closing execution mode can be further improved.

(2) The game board 31B has an upper operation port 36B provided at the opening of the game area, and the upper operation port 36B is provided so as to be openable and closable and forms a bottom surface part by closing. 36B3. Then, the pachinko machine 10 gives a privilege to the player by setting the bottom opening / closing door 36B3 in an open state so that the game ball that has entered the opening of the upper operation port 36B is awarded to the lower operation port 37. . Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a privilege can be given to the player with a simple configuration.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment, and modifications, improvements, and the like within the scope that can achieve the object of the present invention are included in the present invention.
For example, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 enters the opening of the upper working port 36B by setting the bottom opening / closing door 36B3 to an open state when executing a special effect by the special effect executing means. The game ball was awarded to the lower operating port 37 to give a privilege to the player, but if only focusing on giving the player a privilege, if it is different from this, a privilege is given to the player May be. In short, the pachinko machine 10 sets the bottom opening / closing door 36B3 in the open state by the bottom surface driving unit 36B4, so that the game ball that has entered the opening of the upper operation port 36B is awarded to the lower operation port 37 and is given to the player. What is necessary is just to give a privilege.

Specifically, for example, the pachinko machine 10 performs a bottom opening / closing lottery for drawing whether or not the bottom opening / closing door 36B3 is set to an open state, and based on the result of the bottom opening / closing lottery, the bottom surface driving unit 36B4. The bottom opening / closing door 36B3 may be set to an open state or a closed state.
In addition, for example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the bottom opening / closing door 36B3 to the open state by the bottom surface driving unit 36B4 when the number of reserved parts related to the upper working port 36B reaches the upper limit (four in each embodiment). You may comprise.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the second distribution table is more advantageous to the player than the first distribution table because the distribution result tends to be “the most advantageous result”, but the first distribution table and the second distribution table The minute table may have the same contents. Even if configured in this manner, a game ball that has entered the opening of the upper operation port 36B enters the lower operation port 37 when the bottom surface opening / closing door 36B3 is set to the open state by the bottom surface driving unit 36B4. As a result, it is possible to achieve an effect that the path of entering the ball to the lower working port 37 can be diversified.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a fourth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described are assigned the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 31 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the variable prize apparatus according to the fourth embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 includes the game ball holding mechanism 40 provided between the variable winning device 38 and the second out port 39b.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, the game board 31C includes a game ball distribution mechanism 47 provided between the variable winning device 38C and the second out port 39b as shown in FIG. Different from the first embodiment.

  The game ball distribution mechanism 47 includes a distribution unit 471 provided below the special winning opening 38a. Further, the game ball distribution mechanism 47 has an entrance formed upward to allow the game balls distributed to the second out port 39b by the nail 44a to enter, and a game unit that has entered the game ball from the entrance. And a passage having an outlet formed downward so as to drop and enter the ball, and the passage is provided between the big winning port 38a and the second out port 39b.

  The distribution part 471 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped distribution space and opens upward so that the game balls distributed to the second out port 39b by the nail 44a can enter. The distribution part 471 is provided on the left side of the distribution space, and protrudes toward the right side in the horizontal direction, a protruding piece 471a, an upper entrance 471b provided above the protruding piece 471a, and the protruding piece 471a. A lower entrance ball opening 471c provided below and a guide member that is provided adjacent to the projecting piece 471a and guides a game ball that has entered the distribution portion 471 to the upper entrance ball 471b or the lower entrance ball 471c. 471d and a guide member driving unit 471e for driving the guide member 471d.

  The upper entrance 471b and the lower entrance 471c are provided in openings formed in the game area so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction by performing router processing. The upper entrance 471b includes a detection sensor 50k that detects entry of a game ball, and the lower entrance 471c includes a detection sensor 50l that detects entry of a game ball. These detection sensors 50k and 50l are disposed on the back side of the game board 31C. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is the same as the case where the entrance to the first out-port 39a and the second out-port 39b occurs when the entrance into the upper entrance 471b or the lower entrance 471c occurs. In addition, the award ball payout may not be executed, but the award ball payout may be executed.

The guide member 471d is provided at a substantially central position of the distribution space so that the left end can be rotated in the vertical direction (the direction of the double arrow in the figure) with the right end as the center. The guide member 471d brings the left end close to the projecting piece 471a, thereby bringing the game ball into the upper entrance 471b and bringing the left end close to the bottom surface of the distribution space. Thus, it has a lower ball entry state (two-dot chain line position in the figure) for guiding the game ball to the lower ball entrance 471c. The guide member 471d is provided to be inclined so as to descend toward the entrances 471b and 471c, regardless of whether the guide member 471d is set in either the top entrance state or the bottom entrance state. Therefore, the game ball enters the entrances 471b and 471c through the guide member 471d using the inclination of the guide member 471d.
The guide member driving unit 471e drives the guide member 471d to set the guide member 471d to either the upper entry state or the lower entry state.

In the first embodiment, the variable winning device 38 includes the open / close door 38b and the variable winning drive unit 38c for driving the open / close door 38b. The open / close door 38b is formed in a rectangular plate shape and is large. The game board 31 was provided so as to close the opening of the winning opening 38a.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the variable winning device 38C includes an opening / closing door 38d and a variable winning drive unit 38e for driving the opening / closing door 38d, and the opening / closing door 38d is formed in a rectangular plate shape. The game board 31 </ b> C is provided so as to close the large winning opening 38 a and the entrance of the game ball distribution mechanism 47 by being formed by bending a part of the second out opening 39 b downward. This is different from the first embodiment.

  The open / close door 38d is inclined and provided so as to descend as it goes toward the winning prize opening 38a side and the second out opening 39b side with the top just below the nail 44a. The open / close door 38d advances toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31C, thereby closing the large winning opening 38a and the entrance of the game ball distribution mechanism 47, and the game board 31C. By retreating toward the inside and being buried in the game board 31 </ b> C, there is an open state in which the special winning opening 38 a and the entrance of the game ball sorting mechanism 47 are opened.

Therefore, by setting the open / close door 38d to the open state, the game ball that has passed through the left side of the nail 44a can be made to enter the big prize opening 38a, and the game ball that has passed through the right side of the nail 44a can be placed in the distributing portion 471. Can enter the ball. That is, the distribution unit 471 can cause the game ball to enter the distribution space when the game ball is distributed to the second out port 39b by the nail 44a.
Further, by setting the open / close door 38d in a closed state, the game ball that has passed through the right side of the nail 44a flows down toward the open / close door 38d, and then uses the inclination of the open / close door 38d to move the upper surface of the open / close door 38d. Then, the ball enters the second out port 39b.

FIG. 32 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
In the first embodiment, the input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the plurality of detection sensors 50h to 50j, and the output port is connected to the plate driving unit 401c and the guide member driving unit 402e.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, the input port and the output port of the MPU 92 are different from the first embodiment in that they are not connected to them as shown in FIG.

In the first embodiment, the input port of the MPU 62 is connected to the plurality of detection sensors 50a to 50g, and the output port is connected to the variable winning drive unit 38c.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, the input port of the MPU 62 is connected to the plurality of detection sensors 50a to 50g, 50k, 50l, and the output port is connected to the variable winning drive unit 38e and the guide member drive unit 471e. This is different from the first embodiment.
Further, in the first embodiment, the ROM 63 has the success / failure table storage area 63a and the distribution table storage area 63b.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ROM 63 is different from the first embodiment in that it includes only the success / failure table storage area 63a.

FIG. 33 is a diagram showing the contents of each counter used for internal lottery.
In the first embodiment, the MPU 62 includes the jackpot type counter C2, and when the jackpot is generated, the jackpot type counter C2 is used for lottery of the jackpot type.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, the MPU 62 differs from the first embodiment in that it does not include a jackpot type counter C2, as shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the MPU 62 uses the game ball distribution mechanism 47 for the lottery type lottery when the jackpot occurs. This will be described in detail later.

FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a success / failure table that stores the values of random numbers that are won for winning a jackpot.
In the first embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of detachment results: “special losing result (small hit result)” and “normal losing result”.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 differs from the first embodiment in that it has a detachment result of only “normal detachment result” as shown in FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100 execute processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, each process of the change start process, the gaming state transition process, the big prize opening / closing process, the big prize opening opening process, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and the effect determination process are performed as described above. This is different from the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, since the MPU 62 does not include the big hit type counter C2, the big hit type counter C2 is not updated in the timer interruption process and the winning prize process for the operation port. Hereinafter, the contents of each process in this embodiment will be described in order.

FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the variation start process.
In the change start process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1401 to S1410 as shown in FIG.
In step S1401, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the winning lottery mode is the high probability mode.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1401 that the success / failure lottery mode is not the high probability mode, in step S1402, the MPU 62 obtains the success / failure table for the low probability mode (see FIG. 34A) from the success / failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. When it is determined in step S1401 that the success / failure lottery mode is the high probability mode, in step S1403, the success / failure table for the high probability mode (see FIG. 34B) is stored from the success / failure table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. read out.

  After executing the process of step S1402 or step S1403, the MPU 62 executes a success / failure determination process in step S1404. In this success / failure determination process, the MPU 62 compares the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE with the success / failure table read in step S1402 or step S1403, thereby determining the result of the success / failure lottery (result of success / failure). Determine. As described above, the success / failure result is either “big win” or “normal failure result”, which is the same regardless of whether the winning lottery mode is the low probability mode or the high probability mode.

In step S1405, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the result of the determination made in step S1404 is a “big win”.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1405 that the winning / failing result is “big hit winning”, the MPU 62 executes stop result setting processing for the big hit result in step S1406. In the stop result setting process for the jackpot result, the MPU 62 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, and the determination is made. Information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 determines information related to the picture to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45 by referring to the stop result table for the jackpot result stored in advance in the ROM 63.

  On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1405 that the result is not “big win”, the MPU 62 executes a stop result setting process for a normal loss result in step S1407. In the stop result setting process for the normal off result, the MPU 62 determines information related to the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the first result display unit 45a or the second result display unit 45b of the main display unit 45, and the determination The stored information is stored in the RAM 64. Here, the MPU 62 refers to the stop result table for the normal detachment result stored in advance in the ROM 63, and determines information related to the pattern that is finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 45. The mode of the pattern set in the stop result table for the normal loss result is different from the mode of the pattern set in the stop result table for the jackpot result.

After executing the process of step S1406 or step S1407, the MPU 62 executes a display continuation time (display continuation period) setting process in step S1408.
In the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 acquires the value of the variation type counter CS stored in the variation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer of the RAM 64.

  Further, in the display duration setting process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not reach display occurs in the symbol display device 51. Specifically, the MPU 62 wins the reach generation lottery when the success / failure result determined in step S1405 is “big win” and when the success / failure result determined in step S1405 is “normal failure result”. In this case, it is determined that reach display occurs. The MPU 62 executes the reach generation lottery by comparing the reach table stored in advance in the ROM 63 with the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b.

When the MPU 62 determines that the reach display is generated, the MPU 62 refers to the reach generation display duration table stored in the ROM 63 to display the value corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS acquired from the variation type counter buffer. The duration is determined, and the determined display duration is set in a display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 62 refers to the reach non-occurrence display duration table stored in the ROM 63 to obtain the variation type counter acquired from the variation type counter buffer. The display duration corresponding to the value of CS is determined, and the determined display duration is set in a display duration counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.
The contents of the reach generation display duration table and the non-reach display duration table are the same as those in the first embodiment.

In step S1409, the MPU 62 sets a change command and a type command. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the change command and the type command set in step S1409 to the sound emission control device 90.
The sound emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the change command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62. This process will be described in detail later.

The change command includes information related to the display duration time. Further, the change command does not include information on whether or not reach display occurs. These points are the same as in the first embodiment.
The type command includes information related to the result of the determination. In other words, the type command includes each piece of information related to “big hit winning” and “normally lost result” as information related to the success / failure result.

In step S1410, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, and causes the main display unit 45 to start variable display based on the determination result. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the change start process.
Specifically, if the MPU 62 determines that the second result display unit flag is not set in the RAM 64, the first game ball is awarded based on the winning of the game ball to the upper operation port 36 when the game times are digested. Since the result display unit 45a indicates that the variable display is started, the first result display unit 45a starts the variable display.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second result display unit flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 determines the second based on the winning of the game ball to the lower operation port 37 when the game times are digested. Since the result display unit 45b indicates that the variable display is started, the second result display unit 45b starts the variable display.

<Game state transition processing>
FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the game state transition process.
In the gaming state transition process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1501 to S1512 as shown in FIG.
In step S1501, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is being performed.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1501 that it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes processing in step S1502 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1501 that it is in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes processing from step S1508.

First, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the opening / closing execution mode is not being performed in step S1501 (process after step S1502) will be described.
In step S1502, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the variable display on the main display unit 45 has ended. If the MPU 62 determines in step S1502 that the change display on the main display unit 45 has not ended, the MPU 62 ends the gaming state transition process.

  On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1502 that the variable display on the main display unit 45 has been completed, in step S1503, whether or not the result is corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode. Determine whether. Specifically, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the result is “big win”.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1503 that the result of the success / failure does not correspond to the transition to the opening / closing execution mode (when it is determined that the result of the success / failure is “normal result”), the MPU 62 ends the gaming state transition process. To do.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1503 that the result is corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, after setting the opening / closing execution mode flag in the RAM 64, the guide member 471d is set in step S1504. The rotation start process is executed.

  In the rotation start processing of the guide member 471d, the MPU 62 repeatedly sets the guide member 471d to the upper entrance ball state and the lower entrance ball state by executing drive control of the guide member drive unit 471e. In the present embodiment, the period in which the guide member 471d is set in the upper entry state is defined as a period shorter than the period in which the lower entry state is set. Further, the period during which the guide member 471d is set in the upper entrance state and the period during which the guide member 471d is set in the lower entrance state are constant.

In step S1505, the MPU 62 sets “15” to the round counter RC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. The round counter RC is a counter for specifying the number of round games by the MPU 62 when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode.
In step S1506, the MPU 62 sets “1000” as the opening standby time (waiting period) in the timer counter T provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. The value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value every time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for opening is 2 sec. Note that the waiting time is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

In step S1507, the MPU 62 sets an opening command. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the gaming state transition process. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the opening command set in step S1507 to the sound emission control device 90.
The sound emission control device 90 performs a predetermined process based on the opening command transmitted from the MPU 62. This process will be described in detail later.

Next, processing (processing after step S1508) when it is determined in step S1501 that the MPU 62 is in the opening / closing execution mode will be described.
In step S1508, the MPU 62 executes a special winning opening / closing process.

FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the special winning opening / closing process.
In the special winning opening / closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1601 to S1620 as shown in FIG.
In step S1601, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the special winning opening 38a is being opened.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1601 that the special winning opening 38a is not being opened, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1602.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1601 that the special winning opening 38a is being opened, the MPU 62 executes the processes in and after step S1606.

First, the process (the process after step S1602) when it is determined in step S1601 that the MPU 62 does not open the special prize opening 38a will be described.
In step S1602, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0”.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1602 that the value of the round counter RC is “0”, the MPU 62 ends the big prize opening / closing process.
In contrast, if the MPU 62 determines that the value of the round counter RC is not “0” in step S1602, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the timer counter T is “0” in step S1603. To do.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1603 that the value of the timer counter T is not “0”, the MPU 62 ends the big prize opening / closing process.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S1603 that the value of the timer counter T is “0”, in step S1604, the MPU 62 executes a big prize opening process.
Hereinafter, the special winning opening opening process in step S1604 will be described in detail.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special winning opening opening process.
In the special prize opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1701 to S1703 as shown in FIG.
In step S1701, the MPU 62 sets “8” to the winning counter PC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.
In step S1702, the MPU 62 sets “15000” to the timer counter T. As described above, the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value every time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the time set in the timer counter T is 30 seconds.
In step S1703, the MPU 62 executes an opening execution process for the special winning opening 38a. In this opening execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open / close door 38d to an open state by executing drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38e. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the big prize opening process.

Here, when the opening / closing door 38d is set to the open state by executing the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38e, the MPU 62 may cause the game ball that has passed through the left side of the nail 44a to enter the big winning opening 38a. The game ball that has passed the right side of the nail 44a can enter the sorting unit 471. In the above-described rotation start processing of the guide member 471d, the MPU 62 repeatedly sets the guide member 471d to the upper entrance state and the lower entrance state by executing the drive control of the guide member drive unit 471e. The game ball that has entered the split portion 471 enters one of the upper entrance 471b and the lower entrance 471c along the upper surface of the guide member 471d using the inclination of the guide member 471d.
Specifically, the game ball enters the upper entrance 471b when the guide member 471d is set in the upper entrance state.
In contrast, the game ball enters the lower entrance 471c when the guide member 471d is set in the lower entrance state.

Then, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the detection sensor 50k corresponding to the upper entrance 471b has detected the entry of the game ball. If it is determined that the detection has been detected, the MPU 62 sets a high-accuracy result flag in the RAM 64. At the same time, in order to notify the player that the distribution result of the distribution unit 471 is “highly accurate result”, a highly accurate production execution command is set. This high-accuracy flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the distribution result of the distribution unit 471 is “high-accuracy result”. The MPU 62 transmits this high-definition effect execution command to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the high-definition effect execution command transmitted from the MPU 62. This process will be described in detail later.

  In addition, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 50k corresponding to the upper entrance 471b detects the entrance of the game ball, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the guide member drive unit 471e, thereby moving the guide member 471d. After setting the top entry state, the drive control of the guide member drive unit 471e is stopped. As a result, the game ball that has entered the distribution unit 471 enters only the upper entrance 471b.

Further, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the detection sensor 50l corresponding to the lower entrance 471c has detected the entry of the game ball, and when it is determined that the detection has been detected, the distribution result of the distribution unit 471 is In order to notify the player that the “highly accurate result” has not been obtained, a disappointing effect execution command is set. The MPU 62 transmits this unfortunate performance execution command to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the unfortunate performance execution command transmitted from the MPU 62. This process will be described in detail later.

As described above, when the game ball is distributed to the second out port 39b by the nail 44a, the distribution unit 471 drives the guide member 471d by the guide member drive unit 471e and puts the game ball into the upper entrance port. By guiding to 471b or the lower entrance 471c, a special distribution for determining whether or not the lottery mode is shifted to the high probability mode is executed.
For example, in the rotation start processing of the guide member 471d in step S1504, the ratio of the period in which the guide member 471d is set in the upper entry state and the period in which the lower entry state is set is defined as 1: 4. In this case, the game ball that has entered the sorting unit 471 enters the upper entrance 471b with a probability of 20%, and enters the lower entrance 471c with a probability of 80%. In other words, each time one game ball enters the sorting unit 471, the sorting result of the sorting unit 471 becomes a “high-precision result” with a probability of 20%. According to this, when five game balls enter the distribution unit 471, the distribution result of the distribution unit 471 is a “highly accurate result” with a probability of 20% for each game ball. As a result, the probability is high with a probability of about 67%. Therefore, the probability that the result of distribution by the distribution unit 471 becomes a “highly accurate result” increases as the nail 44a is set so as to distribute more game balls to the second out port 39b.

Returning to the description of the big prize opening / closing process, the processes after step S1605 will be described with reference to FIG.
The MPU 62 sets the release command in step S1605 after executing the special winning opening release process in step S1604. Further, the MPU 62 transmits the release command set in step S1605 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the special prize opening / closing process.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the open / close door 38d is set to the open state based on the open command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, processing (processing after step S1606) when it is determined in step S1601 that the MPU 62 is opening the special winning opening 38a will be described.
In step S1606, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the timer counter T is “0”. In other words, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the upper limit duration set in the timer counter T has elapsed in step S1702 of the special prize opening process.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1606 that the value of the timer counter T is not “0”, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1607 onward.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1606 that the value of the timer counter T is “0”, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1617.

First, the processing when the MPU 62 determines that the value of the timer counter T is not “0” in step S1606 (processing after step S1607) will be described.
In step S1607, the MPU 62 determines whether or not a winning to the big winning opening 38a has occurred. The determination as to whether or not a winning at the special winning opening 38a has occurred is executed based on the detection result of the detection sensor 50d corresponding to the special winning opening 38a.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1607 that no winning a prize winning opening 38a has occurred, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening / closing process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1607 that a winning to the big winning opening 38a has occurred, the MPU 62 updates the value of the winning counter PC by subtracting 1 in step S1608.

In step S1609, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is “0”.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1609 that the value of the winning counter PC is not “0”, the MPU 62 ends the big winning opening / closing process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines that the value of the winning counter PC is “0” in step S1609, the MPU 62 executes a closing execution process in step S1610. In this closing execution process, the MPU 62 sets the open / close door 38d in the closed state by executing drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38e.

In step S1611, the MPU 62 sets a close command. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the close command set in step S1611 to the sound emission control device 90.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the open / close door 38d is set to the closed state based on the close command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

In step S1612, the MPU 62 updates 1 by subtracting 1 from the value of the round counter RC. In step S1613, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0”.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1613 that the value of the round counter RC is not “0”, the MPU 62 sets “500” as the value of the timer counter T in step S1614. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the special prize opening / closing process.

  Here, the value set in the timer counter T in step S1614 is the waiting for opening after the opening / closing door 38d is set in the open state and then set in the closed state again until the door 38d is set in the open state again. Time is prescribed. In the present embodiment, the opening standby time is 1 sec. This open waiting time is the same regardless of the progress.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1613 that the value of the round counter RC is “0”, the MPU 62 executes processing in step S1615 and subsequent steps.
In step S1615, the MPU 62 sets “2000” as the ending standby time (standby period) in the timer counter T. As described above, the value set in the timer counter T is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value every time the timer interrupt process is executed. Therefore, the waiting time for ending is 4 sec. Note that the waiting time is not limited to this and is arbitrary.

In step S1616, the MPU 62 sets an ending command. In step S301 of the normal process, the MPU 62 transmits the ending command set in step S1616 to the sound emission control device 90. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the special prize opening / closing process.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes the end of the opening / closing execution mode based on the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

Next, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the value of the timer counter T is “0” in step S1606 (process after step S1617) will be described.
In step S1617, the MPU 62 executes the closing execution process as in step S1610 described above.
In step S1618, the MPU 62 sets a close command as in step S1611 described above.

In step S1619, the MPU 62 subtracts 1 from the value of the round counter RC and updates it.
In step S1620, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0”.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1620 that the value of the round counter RC is not “0”, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1614 described above.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1620 that the value of the round counter RC is “0”, the MPU 62 executes the processing from S1615 described above.

Returning to the description of the gaming state transition processing, the processing after step S1509 will be described with reference to FIG.
The MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “0” in step S1509 after executing the special prize opening / closing process.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1509 that the value of the round counter RC is not “0”, the MPU 62 ends the gaming state transition process.
In contrast, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1509 that the value of the round counter RC is “0”, the MPU 62 determines in step S1510 whether the value of the timer counter T is “0”. To do.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1510 that the value of the timer counter T is not “0”, the MPU 62 ends the gaming state transition process.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1510 that the value of the timer counter T is “0”, the MPU 62 executes rotation stop processing for the guide member 471d in step S1511. In the rotation stopping process of the guide member 471d, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the guide member drive unit 471e to set the guide member 471d to the top-in-ball state, and then performs the drive control of the guide member drive unit 471e. Stop.

In step S1512, the MPU 62 clears the open / close execution mode flag stored in the RAM 64, and then executes a transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the gaming state transition process.
Hereinafter, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode will be described in detail.

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode.
In the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1801 to S1808 as shown in FIG.
In step S <b> 1801, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result of the distribution unit 471 is a “highly accurate result”. Specifically, the MPU 62 refers to the high-accuracy result flag stored in the RAM 64 to determine whether or not the distribution result of the distribution unit 471 is “high-accuracy result”.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S1801 that the distribution result of the distribution unit 471 is “highly accurate result” (when the highly accurate result flag is set), the MPU 62 executes the processing after step S1802. .
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1801 that the distribution result of the distribution unit 471 has not become a “high-accuracy result” (when the high-accuracy result flag has been cleared), the MPU 62 performs step S1805. The subsequent processing is executed.

First, processing (processing after step S1802) in the case where it is determined in step S1801 that the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result of the distribution unit 471 is “highly accurate result” will be described.
In step S1802, the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. If the high frequency support flag is already set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains this. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.

In step S1803, the MPU 62 clears the number limit flag stored in the RAM 64.
Here, when the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number of times limit flag is not set, the high frequency support mode is continued until at least “Big Winning” is selected in the lottery.

  In step S1804, the MPU 62 sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 64. If the high probability mode flag is already set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains this. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the success / failure lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high-probability mode continues until at least a “hit win” is made in the winning lottery. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode.

  When ending the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 clears the high-accuracy result flag. In step S1401 of the above-described variation start process, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the current lottery mode is the high probability mode by determining whether or not the high probability mode flag is set in the RAM 64. Yes.

Next, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the distribution result of the distribution unit 471 does not become the “highly accurate result” (the process after step S1805) will be described.
In step S1805, the MPU 62 clears the high probability mode flag. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the success / failure lottery mode to the low probability mode. This low-probability mode is continued until at least a “hit win” is made in the lottery.

In step S1806, the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. If the high frequency support flag is already set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains this. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode.
In step S1807, the MPU 62 sets “100” to the value of the game number counter provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.
In step S1808, the MPU 62 sets a number limit flag in the RAM 64. If the number limit flag is already set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains this. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode.

Here, in the high-frequency support mode, when the high-frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64 and the number-of-times limit flag is set, 100 games that are the end reference number set in the game number counter are set. Continue until digested. The MPU 62 clears the high-frequency support flag and the number-of-times restriction flag when 100 game times have been consumed. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the low frequency support mode.
The MPU 62 executes these processes as a power combination support process in step S305 of the normal process, but detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, when the winning / losing lottery is “big hit winning” and the distribution result of the distribution unit 471 is “highly accurate result”, the gaming state is the open / close execution mode regardless of the current gaming state. After completing the above, the mode shifts to the high probability mode and shifts to the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode are continued until at least a “big win” is selected in the winning lottery.

  In addition, when the winning / losing lottery is “big hit winning” and the distribution result of the distribution unit 471 does not become “highly accurate result”, the gaming state is the open / close execution mode regardless of the current gaming state. After completion, the mode shifts to the low probability mode and shifts to the high frequency support mode. The low-probability mode will continue until at least “Big Winning” is selected in the winning lottery, and the high frequency support mode will be low if 100 game games are consumed without becoming “Big Winning” in the winning lottery. Enter frequency support mode.

<Regarding the effect determination process executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 40 shows a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process in order to execute an effect for game times, an effect for an opening / closing execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 periodically executes steps S1901 to S1912 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) as shown in FIG.

In step S1901, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the change command and the type command transmitted from the MPU 62 are received.
If the MPU 92 determines in step S1901 that the command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processing from step S1907.
In contrast, if the MPU 92 determines in step S1901 that each command has been received, in step S1902, based on the content of the type command, whether the success / failure result is “big win” or not. Determine.

  If the MPU 92 determines in step S1902 that the winning / failing result is “big hit winning”, in step S1903, the MPU 92 executes a symbol determination process for winning big win. In the jackpot winning symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines information relating to a combination of symbols having the same number as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the active line L.

  In contrast, if the MPU 92 determines in step S1902 that the success / failure result is not “big win” (when it is determined that the success / failure result is “ordinary loss result”), in step S1904, the MPU 92 is for a normal failure. The symbol determination process is executed. In the normal determination symbol determination process, the MPU 92 determines whether or not reach display occurs based on the contents of the variation command.

When the MPU 92 determines that reach display occurs, the MPU 92 determines information related to the combination of symbols for reach display as a stop result to be finally stopped and displayed on the active line L. The combination of symbols for reach display is randomly determined by lottery or the like.
On the other hand, when the MPU 92 determines that the reach display does not occur, the MPU 92 displays information related to a combination of symbols different from the combination of the symbols described above as a stop result that is finally stopped on the active line L. decide. Specifically, the MPU 92 randomly determines a combination of symbols having the same number and a combination of symbols different from the combination of symbols for reach display by lottery or the like.

  After executing the process of step S1903 or step S1904, the MPU 92 executes an effect pattern determination process in step S1905. In this effect pattern determination process, the MPU 92 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the variation command and the type command by referring to the effect table stored in advance in the ROM 93. Specifically, the MPU 92 selects the production duration (production duration) and the content of the production as the production pattern. Further, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and voice control of the speaker unit 24 based on the selected effect pattern. In step S1905, the MPU 92 also executes a lottery to determine whether or not to generate a notice display.

  In step S1906, the MPU 92 transmits a stop result command including information related to the stop result determined in the process of step S1903 or step S1904 and a pattern command including the effect pattern selected in step S1905 to the display control apparatus 100. To do.

  Based on the stop result command and the pattern command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out a data table for executing the game-turn effect on the symbol display device 51 from the program ROM 103. The MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 51 executes an effect for game times based on the effect pattern selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90, and finally displays the stop result determined by the MPU 92 on the active line L. Stop display.

After executing the process of step S1906 or when determining that the change command and the type command are not received in step S1901, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S1907.
In step S1907, the MPU 92 determines whether an opening command has been received.

If the MPU 92 determines in step S1907 that an opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processing from step S1910.
In contrast, if the MPU 92 determines in step S1907 that it has received the opening command, the MPU 92 executes an execution process for the effect for opening / closing execution mode in step S1908. In the execution process of the opening / closing execution mode effect, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and the sound control of the speaker unit 24. Note that the duration of the effect for the opening / closing execution mode corresponds to the time when the opening / closing of the special winning opening 38a is executed 15 times in a long-time manner in the opening / closing execution mode.

In step S1909, the MPU 92 transmits an opening / closing execution mode command to the display control apparatus 100.
Based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out a data table for executing the effect for the opening / closing execution mode on the symbol display device 51 from the program ROM 103. The MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. Thereby, the symbol display device 51 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode.

  Here, as described above, when the open / close door 38d is set to the open state by executing the drive control of the variable winning drive unit 38e, the MPU 62 sets the game ball that has passed the left side of the nail 44a to the big winning opening 38a. The game ball that has passed through the right side of the nail 44a can enter the sorting unit 471. In the above-described rotation start processing of the guide member 471d, the MPU 62 repeatedly sets the guide member 471d to the upper entrance state and the lower entrance state by executing the drive control of the guide member drive unit 471e. The game ball that has entered the split portion 471 enters one of the upper entrance 471b and the lower entrance 471c along the upper surface of the guide member 471d using the inclination of the guide member 471d.

Further, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 50k corresponding to the upper entrance 471b has detected the entrance of the game ball, the MPU 62 sets a high-accuracy result flag in the RAM 64 and distributes it. In order to notify the player that the distribution result of the unit 471 has become a “highly accurate result”, a highly accurate effect execution command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90.
Furthermore, as described above, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 50l corresponding to the lower entrance 471c has detected the entry of the game ball, the distribution result of the distribution unit 471 is “high-precision result”. In order to notify the player that it has not been established, a disappointing effect execution command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90.

  Therefore, the display control device 100 performs display control of the symbol display device 51 so as to display an image for notifying the player that a special effect is to be executed based on the high-definition effect execution command or the unfortunate effect execution command. Execute. Note that the display control device 100 releases this image at a timing before the end of the 15th R.

After executing the process of step S1909 or when it is determined in step S1907 that the opening command has not been received, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S1910.
In step S1910, the MPU 92 determines whether or not a high-definition effect execution command or a disappointing effect execution command has been received.

If the MPU 92 determines in step S1910 that it has not received the high-definition effect execution command or the unfortunate effect execution command, it executes the processing from step S1912 onward.
On the other hand, if the MPU 92 determines in step S1910 that it has received a high-definition effect execution command or a disappointing effect execution command, it executes a special effect result notification process in step S1911.

  In this special effect result notification process, if the MPU 92 determines in step S1910 that it has received a highly accurate effect execution command, the distribution result of the distribution unit 471 is “highly accurate result”. Is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100 in order to notify the player. At this time, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and also performs sound control of the speaker unit 24. The display control device 100 then notifies the player that the distribution result of the distribution unit 471 is “highly accurate result” based on a predetermined command transmitted from the MPU 92. Execute display control.

  If the MPU 92 determines in step S1910 that it has received the unfortunate performance execution command, the MPU 92 notifies the player that the distribution result of the distribution unit 471 has not become a “highly accurate result”. Therefore, a predetermined command is transmitted to the display control apparatus 100. At this time, the MPU 92 executes light emission control of the display lamp unit 23 and also performs sound control of the speaker unit 24. The display control device 100 then notifies the player that the distribution result of the distribution unit 471 does not become a “highly accurate result” based on a predetermined command transmitted from the MPU 92. 51 display control is executed.

MPU92 performs the process after step S1912 after performing the process of step S1911 or when it determines with not receiving the high-definition effect execution command or the unfortunate effect execution command in step S1910.
In step S1912, the MPU 92 executes other processing. In other processes, the MPU 92 executes a process for advancing the effect for the opening / closing execution mode based on, for example, the opening command, the closing command, and the ending command transmitted from the MPU 62. Thereafter, the MPU 92 ends the effect determination process.

Thus, in this embodiment, the game ball distribution mechanism 47 drives the guide member 471d by the guide member drive unit 471e when the game ball is distributed to the second out port 39b by the nail 44a. Function as special distribution execution means for executing special distribution for determining whether or not the winning lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode by guiding the game balls to the upper entrance 471b or the lower entrance 471c To do.
Further, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 determine whether or not the distribution result of the distribution unit 471 is a “highly accurate result” based on the distribution result executed by the game ball distribution mechanism 47. In order to notify the player of this, it functions as a special effect execution means for executing a special effect.

According to the present embodiment as described above, the following operations and effects can be achieved.
(1) The game ball distribution mechanism 47 performs special distribution when the game balls are distributed to the second out port 39b by the nail 44a. Then, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute a special effect based on the distribution result executed by the game ball distribution mechanism 47. According to this, when the nail 44a is set so as to distribute many game balls to the second out port 39b, it is compared with the case where the nail 44a is set so as to distribute many game balls to the prize winning port 38a. Thus, the player can enjoy many lotteries and many effects. In other words, even when the nail 44a is set so as to distribute a large number of game balls to the second out port 39b, the player can play the game comfortably. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the player can comfortably play the game without reducing the degree of freedom of setting the nail 44a, and the player's attention to the game can be improved.
(2) The nail 44a is set by switching between the first state and the second state, thereby distributing the game balls to the big winning opening 38a and entering the game balls into the second out port 39b. It is possible to set the ratio of entering and placing the ball. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the configuration of the distribution means can be simplified.

(3) Since the game ball distribution mechanism 47 is provided between the big prize opening 38a and the second out port 39b, the player can check whether or not the game ball has entered the second out port 39b. It is easier to focus on whether or not a game ball has entered the big prize opening 38a and the game ball distribution mechanism 47. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the player can comfortably play the game without reducing the degree of freedom of setting the nail 44a, and the player's attention to the game can be improved.

(4) The game ball sorting mechanism 47 drives the guide member 471d by the guide member drive unit 471e to guide the game ball to the upper entrance 471b or the lower entrance 471c, so that the lottery mode is high. A special distribution can be performed to determine whether to enter the probability mode. Therefore, according to this embodiment, since the player pays attention to the whereabouts of the game ball, the player's attention to the game can be improved.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment, and modifications, improvements, and the like within the scope that can achieve the object of the present invention are included in the present invention.
For example, in the present embodiment, the game ball distribution mechanism 47 is provided between the special winning opening 38a and the second out opening 39b, but may be provided at a position other than this. In short, the game ball distribution mechanism 47 only needs to be able to execute special distribution using the game ball when the game ball is distributed to the second out port 39b by the nail 44a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball distribution mechanism 47 includes an upper entrance 471b, a lower entrance 471c, and a game ball that has entered the distribution unit 471 as an upper entrance 471b or a lower entrance. Although the guide member 471d that guides the guide member 471c and the guide member drive unit 471e that drives the guide member 471d are provided, other configurations may be used. In short, the special distribution execution unit only needs to be able to execute special distribution.
Specifically, for example, the game ball distribution mechanism 47 performs special distribution using the game ball that has entered the distribution unit 471, but the game that has entered the second out port 39b. Special sorting may be performed using a sphere. In addition, for example, the distribution unit 471 performs special distribution by rotating the guide member 471d, but the display unit 51 such as the symbol display unit 51, the segment display unit, or the dot display unit is used. Special sorting may be performed using this.

  In the present embodiment, in the rotation start process of the guide member 471d, the period during which the guide member 471d is set in the upper entry state is defined as a period shorter than the period during which the lower entry state is set. However, the period during which the guide member 471d is set in the upper entry state and the period during which the lower entry state is set may be the same, and the guide member 471d is set in the upper entry state. The period that is set may be defined as a period that is longer than the period set in the lower entry state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the rotation start processing of the guide member 471d, the period during which the guide member 471d is set in the upper entrance ball state and the period during which the lower entrance ball state is set are constant. Not necessarily. For example, the period in which the guide member 471d is set in the upper entry state and the period in which the guide member 471d is set in the lower entry state may be randomly changed by lottery or the like. The number may be varied according to the ratio of the number of game balls entering the second out port 39b to the number of game balls played.

  Specifically, the gaming ball distribution mechanism 47 is configured such that the ratio of the number of game balls that have entered the second out port 39b to the number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 38a during a predetermined period is greater than the predetermined ratio. Is higher (or when the number of game balls that have entered the second out port 39b in a predetermined period is larger than the predetermined number), there is a period during which the guide member 471d is set in the top-in-ball state. You may set so that it may become longer than the period which has set the guide member 471d to the lower entrance ball state. According to this, when the nail 44a is set so as to distribute many game balls to the second out port 39b, it is compared with the case where the nail 44a is set so as to distribute many game balls to the prize winning port 38a. Thus, the pachinko machine 10 can easily shift to a gaming state (high probability mode) advantageous to the player.

  In the present embodiment, in the rotation start processing of the guide member 471d, the MPU 62 repeatedly sets the guide member 471d to the upper entrance ball state and the lower entrance ball state by executing drive control of the guide member drive unit 471e. However, after executing the opening execution process of the special winning opening 38a, the time when the game ball is continuously fired with the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 27 being maximized is measured, and a predetermined time has passed. Alternatively, the lower entry state may be switched to the upper entry state. According to this, the one opening time of the big winning opening 38a is such that the more the nail 44a is set so that more gaming balls are distributed to the second out opening 39b (the total number of gaming balls to the big winning opening 38a is Since the number of winning prizes becomes longer (as it becomes harder to reach a predetermined upper limit number), the distribution result of the distribution unit 471 is such that the more the nail 44a is set so that more game balls are distributed to the second out port 39b. The probability of a “highly accurate result” increases.

[Fifth Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a fifth embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described are assigned the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 41 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to the fifth embodiment of the present invention.
In the first embodiment, the front door frame 13 includes an upper bulging portion 25 provided below the window portion 21, and the upper bulging portion 25 has an upper plate 25 a.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, the front door frame 13 includes an upper bulging portion 25D provided below the window portion 21, as shown in FIG. It differs from the upper bulging part 25 in the said 1st Embodiment by having 25a and the pushbutton 25b provided in the left side part of the front.

The push button 25b includes a light source (not shown) therein. Then, the sound emission control device 90 can turn on the light source incorporated in the push button 25b based on the command transmitted from the MPU 62.
Note that the push button 25b is normally disabled so that it does not function even when pressed by the player. The trigger for enabling the push button 25b will be described in detail later.

FIG. 42 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the general winning opening.
In the first embodiment, the game board 31 includes the general winning opening 35 provided on the left side of the game area.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 42, the game board 31D has a general winning opening 35D provided on the left side of the gaming area and a holding device 48 provided so as to surround the general winning opening 35D. It differs from the game board 31 in the said 1st Embodiment by the point provided with (holding means).

  The general winning opening 35D has the same function as the general winning opening 35 in the first embodiment except for the arrangement position thereof. Specifically, the general winning opening 35D includes a detection sensor 50a (see FIG. 43) that detects the entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 50a is disposed on the back side of the game board 31D. Note that the pachinko machine 10 pays out 10 prize balls when a ball enters the general prize opening 35D.

  The holding device 48 is provided above the general winning opening 35D, and a holding portion 481 for holding a game ball entering the general winning opening 35D, and a panel portion provided on the game board 31D so as to surround the holding portion 481. 482. Note that the distance between the game board 31D and the panel unit 482 is wider than that of one game ball. Thereby, the game ball can fall between the game board 31D and the panel unit 482.

  The holding section 481 has an entrance formed upward to allow a game ball to enter, and an exit formed downward to allow the game ball entered from this entrance to fall toward the general winning opening 35D. The passage is provided between the plurality of nails 44D provided above the holding device 48 and the general winning opening 35D. Further, the passage is provided with a left wall portion 481L disposed on the left side of itself and a right wall portion 481R disposed on the right side of the passage and having an upper end set lower than an upper end of the left wall portion 481L. The left wall portion 481L and the right wall portion 481R are disposed between the game board 31D and the panel portion 482. The interval between the left wall portion 481L and the plurality of nails 44D is narrower than that for one game ball, and the interval between the right wall portion 481R and the plurality of nails 44D is wider than that for one game ball. ing.

  The retaining portion 481 includes an upper plate 481a provided from the upper end position of the left wall portion 481L to the upper end position of the right wall portion 481R, a lower plate 481b provided below the upper plate 481a, an upper plate 481a, And a plate driver 481c for driving the plate 481b.

  The upper plate 481a is provided on the game board 31D so as to close the entrance of the holding portion 481. Further, the upper plate 481a is provided to be inclined so as to descend from the left wall portion 481L side of the retaining portion 481 toward the right wall portion 481R side. The upper plate 481a advances toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31D, thereby closing the entrance of the holding portion 481 and retreating toward the inside of the game board 31D. It has an open state in which the entrance of the holding part 481 is opened by being buried in the container.

The lower plate 481b is provided on the game board 31D so as to close the outlet of the holding portion 481. The lower plate 481b moves forward toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31D, thereby closing the outlet of the holding portion 481 and retreating toward the inside of the game board 31D. It has the open state which opens the exit of the reservation part 481 by being buried in.
The plate driving unit 481c drives the upper plate 481a and the lower plate 481b to set the plates 481a and 481b to either the open state or the closed state.

Here, when the plates 481a and 481b are both set in a closed state, a holding space defined by the plates 481a and 481b can be formed in the passage of the holding portion 481. This holding space has a size capable of holding two game balls up and down.
Therefore, the holding unit 481 can set the upper plate 481a in the open state and the lower plate 481b in the closed state, thereby allowing the game balls that have passed through the plurality of nails 44D to enter the holding space. The holding unit 481 includes a detection sensor 50m (see FIG. 43) that detects the entry of the second game ball. The detection sensor 50m is disposed on the back side of the game board 31D and 2 It is arranged at a position corresponding to the first game ball. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not perform the payout of the winning ball when the entering into the holding unit 481 occurs, unlike the case where the entering into the various winning openings occurs.

  In the present embodiment, the holding unit 481 includes the detection sensor 50m that detects the entry of the second game ball. However, for example, each of the reservation balls 481 receives the first game ball and the second game ball, respectively. You may provide the two detection sensors to detect. In this case, each detection sensor may be disposed on the back side of the game board and at a position corresponding to the first and second game balls. In short, the reservation unit 481 only needs to be able to detect that two game balls have entered the reservation space.

  Further, the holding unit 481 moves the upper plate 481a after the two game balls enter the holding space, that is, after the detection sensor 50m detects the second game ball entering the holding space. By setting the closed state, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down toward the holding portion 481 from entering the holding space. Here, the game balls that have passed through the plurality of nails 44D flow down toward the retaining portion 481, and then use the inclination of the upper plate 481a to travel along the upper surface of the upper plate 481a to the right wall portion 481R of the retaining portion 481. Then, it passes between the plurality of nails 44D. Further, when the lower plate 481b is set to the open state, the holding unit 481 can drop the game ball held in the holding space and enter the general winning opening 35D.

  In this embodiment, the retaining portion 481 includes an upper plate 481a and a lower plate 481b, and the game balls that have passed through the plurality of nails 44D flow down toward the retaining portion 481, and then the upper plate 481a is inclined. Is used to pass between the right wall portion 481R of the retaining portion 481 and the plurality of nails 44D along the upper surface of the upper plate 481a. On the other hand, the storage unit 481 may not include the upper plate 481a. In this case, after the game balls that have passed through the plurality of nails 44D flow down toward the holding portion 481, the game balls that have entered the holding space travel along the upper portion of the game balls 481R and the plurality of right wall portions 481R. What is necessary is just to adjust the space | interval of the entrance of the holding | maintenance part 481, and the lower plate 481b so that it may pass between between the nail | claw 44D.

FIG. 43 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
In the first embodiment, the input port of the MPU 62 is connected to the plurality of detection sensors 50a to 50g.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, the input port of the MPU 62 is connected to a plurality of detection sensors 50a to 50g, 50m, a push button 25b, and a payout control device 70 as shown in FIG. This is different from the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, the output port is different from the first embodiment in that the output port is connected to the plate driving unit 481c.

  In the present embodiment, the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100 execute processing different from that in the first embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the timer interrupt process, the main process, the normal process, the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and the effect determination process are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of each process in this embodiment will be described in order.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 44 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process.
In the timer interrupt process, the MPU 62 periodically executes steps S101D to S106D (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) as shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the MPU 62 executes steps S102 to S105 in the same manner as in the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, the MPU 62 executes step S101D instead of step S101 in the first embodiment. Further, in the present embodiment, the MPU 62 executes the holding device opening / closing process of step S106D after executing the winning process for the operation port of step S105.

In step S101D, the MPU 62 executes a reading process for the plurality of detection sensors 50a to 50g and 50m. In this reading process, the MPU 62 reads the states of the plurality of detection sensors 50a to 50g, 50m, determines the states, and stores them in the RAM 64 as winning detection information. When the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensors 50a to 50d corresponding to the various winning openings detect the winning of the game ball, the MPU 62 sets a winning ball command for instructing the paying out of the winning ball. The command is transmitted to the payout control device 70. For example, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 50d corresponding to the variable winning device 38 has detected the winning of the game ball, the MPU 62 gives a prize ball command for instructing 15 prize balls that are a specific unit number. Is sent to the payout control device 70.
The payout control device 70 performs payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out a prize ball based on a prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 62.

<Holder opening / closing process>
FIG. 45 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of the holding device opening / closing process.
In the holding device opening / closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S2001 to S2010 as shown in FIG.
In step S2001, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the detection sensor 50m corresponding to the holding device 48 detects that a game ball has entered (whether or not a second game ball has entered the holding device 48). Thus, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the holding device 48.

If the MPU 62 determines that the second game ball has entered the holding device 48, the MPU 62 executes the upper plate closing process in step S2002. In the upper plate closing process, the MPU 62 sets the upper plate 481a in the closed state by executing drive control of the plate driving unit 481c.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the second game ball has not entered the holding device 48 (when no game ball has entered the holding space of the holding unit 481, or the holding unit 481). In the case where only the first game ball is in the reserved space), the upper plate releasing process is executed in step S2003. In the upper plate opening process, the MPU 62 sets the upper plate 481a in an open state by executing drive control of the plate driving unit 481c.

After executing the process of step S2002 or step S2003, the MPU 62 determines in step S2004 whether or not the push button 25b is enabled.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S2004 that the push button 25b is not valid, the MPU 62 ends the holding device opening / closing process without executing the processes in and after step S2005.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S2004 that the push button 25b is valid, the MPU 62 executes processing in step S2005 and subsequent steps.

  The MPU 62 determines whether or not the push button 25b is valid by referring to the push button valid flag stored in the RAM 64. Here, the push button valid flag is a flag for specifying whether or not the push button 25b is valid. Specifically, the MPU 62 specifies that the push button 25b is valid when the push button valid flag is set in the RAM 64, and if the push button valid flag is not set in the RAM 64, The push button 25b is not valid (the push button 25b is invalid). The trigger for enabling or disabling the push button 25b will be described in detail later.

In step S2005, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the pressing of the push button 25b is detected.
If the MPU 62 determines that pressing of the push button 25b has not been detected, the MPU 62 ends the holding device opening / closing process without executing the processes in and after step S2006.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines that the pressing of the push button 25b is detected, in step S2006, the MPU 62 executes a lower plate opening process. In the lower plate opening process, the MPU 62 sets the lower plate 481b in an open state by executing drive control of the plate driving unit 481c.

In step S2007, the MPU 62 sets a hold release command in order to notify the player that the lower plate 481b is set to the open state and the game ball held in the hold space is put into the general winning opening 35D. To do. The MPU 62 transmits this hold release command to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the hold release command transmitted from the MPU 62. This process will be described in detail later.

  In step S2008, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 5 sec, which is the lower plate opening period, has elapsed. If the MPU 62 determines in step S2008 that 5 seconds have not elapsed, the MPU 62 repeatedly executes the process of step S2008. If the MPU 62 determines that 5 seconds have elapsed in step S2008, the MPU 62 executes the processes in and after step S2009.

  Here, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 5 seconds have elapsed by counting the number of executions of the process in step S2008. For example, when the interval at which the process of step S2008 is repeatedly executed is 0.1 msec, the MPU 62 determines that 5 seconds have elapsed when the number of executions of the process of step S2008 is counted and reaches 50000. In addition, the structure which measures the period for lower plate opening is arbitrary, For example, you may measure the period for lower plate opening using a real-time clock.

In step S2009, the MPU 62 executes a lower plate closing process. In this lower plate closing process, the MPU 62 sets the lower plate 481b in a closed state by executing drive control of the plate driving unit 481c.
In step S2010, the MPU 62 clears the push button valid flag stored in the RAM 64 and changes the push button 25b to invalid.
As described above, when the MPU 62 determines that the push button 25b is valid and then determines that the push button 25b has been pressed, the MPU 62 sets the lower plate 481b to the open state, and opens the lower plate. After the period (5 sec) elapses, the lower plate 481b is set to the closed state again and the push button 25b is disabled.

  Thereby, the reservation unit 481 causes the game ball held in the reservation space to enter the general winning opening 35D. Specifically, the holding device 48 is configured to be able to hold two game balls, and when the holding of the game ball by the holding device 48 is released, of the pending game balls (maximum of two) All the game balls are made to enter the general winning opening 35D. In other words, the lower plate opening period is set to a period sufficient to drop two game balls and enter the general winning opening 35D.

  Accordingly, the push button 25b functions as a release device that releases the hold of the game ball by the hold device 48 based on the operation of the player. In this embodiment, the push button 25b is used as the release device. However, an input device other than the button may be used, and a non-contact input device such as a capacitive touch sensor is used. May be. In short, the release device only needs to be able to release the hold of the game ball by the hold means based on the player's operation.

In this embodiment, the MPU 62 sets the lower plate 481b to the open state, and sets the lower plate 481b to the closed state again after the lower plate opening period (5 sec) has elapsed. Based on the detection result of the detection sensor 50m corresponding to, it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the holding unit 481, and if it is determined that no game ball has entered the holding unit 481, the lower plate 481b may be set to the closed state again.
Further, in the present embodiment, the holding device 48 is configured to be able to hold two game balls, but may be configured to be able to hold one game ball, and a plurality of three or more games The ball may be configured to be held.

<Main processing>
FIG. 46 is a flowchart of the main process.
In the main process, the MPU 62 executes steps S401 to S412 as shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the MPU 62 executes the process of step S408 or step S410 and then executes the initialization process of the holding device in step S413D before executing step S411, and performs the other steps in the first step. This is executed in the same manner as in the embodiment.

  In step S413D, the MPU 62 executes initialization processing for the plates 481a and 481b of the holding device 48. Specifically, the MPU 62 confirms the operation of the holding device 48 by driving the upper plate 481a and the lower plate 481b by the plate driving unit 481c. In addition, the MPU 62 sets the upper plate 481a and the lower plate 481b in a closed state by driving the upper plate 481a and the lower plate 481b by the plate driving unit 481c after performing the operation confirmation of the holding device 48.

  Here, in step S413D, the MPU 62 repeatedly sets the upper plate 481a and the lower plate 481b to the open state and the closed state by executing the drive control of the plate driving unit 481c, and executes the operation check of the holding device 48. Therefore, the game balls being held by the holding device 48 (game balls that have already entered the holding unit 481 before turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10) enter the general winning opening 35D. At this time, when the payout device 71 executes the payout of the prize ball, the game hall manager uses the game ball paid out by the payout device 71 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. The work will be time consuming.

  Therefore, in step S413D, the MPU 62 executes an operation check of the holding device 48 before the payout device 71 becomes operable. According to this, the MPU 62 does not cause the payout device 71 to perform payout of the winning ball even when the game ball being held by the holding device 48 enters the general winning opening 35D when confirming the operation of the holding device 48. Can be. Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the payout device 71 does not pay out the prize ball, so that the manager of the game hall does not have to collect the game ball from the pachinko machine 10, and The burden can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the MPU 62 executes an operation check of the holding device 48 before the payout device 71 becomes operable, so that the game being held by the holding device 48 when the operation of the holding device 48 is confirmed. Even when the ball enters the general winning opening 35D, the payout device 71 is prevented from executing the payout of the prize ball. On the other hand, for example, the MPU 62 performs an operation check of the holding device 48 before the detection sensor 50m becomes operable, so that the game held by the holding device 48 when the operation of the holding device 48 is confirmed. Even when the ball enters the general winning opening 35D, the payout device 71 may not be made to perform the payout of the winning ball. In short, the MPU 62 prevents the payout device 71 from paying out the winning ball even when the game ball being held by the holding device 48 enters the general winning opening 35D when the operation of the holding device 48 is confirmed. I can do it.

  Further, in this embodiment, the MPU 62 pays out the winning ball to the payout device 71 even when the game ball being held by the holding device 48 enters the general winning opening 35D when the operation of the holding device 48 is confirmed. I tried not to let it run. On the other hand, from the viewpoint that the game ball that is being held by the holding device 48 is originally a game ball that should be paid out from the pachinko machine 10, the MPU 62 checks the operation of the holding device 48. In the case where a game ball that is on hold enters the general winning opening 35D, the payout device 71 may be made to pay out the winning ball.

<Normal processing>
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a flowchart of normal processing.
In the normal process, the MPU 62 executes steps S301 to S313 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 47, the MPU 62 executes the payout rate calculation process in step S314D after executing step S306 and before executing step S307, and performs the other steps. This is executed in the same manner as in the first embodiment.

<Decision rate calculation processing>
FIG. 48 is a diagram illustrating a flowchart of a payout rate calculation process.
In the payout rate calculation process, the MPU 62 executes steps S2101 to S2109 as shown in FIG.
In step S2101, the MPU 62 determines whether or not it is in the high frequency support mode. Specifically, the MPU 62 refers to the high frequency support flag stored in the RAM 64 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S2101 that it is not in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 62 ends the payout rate calculation process without executing the processes in and after step S2102.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S2101 that it is in the high-frequency support mode, the MPU 62 executes the processing after step S2102.

  In step S2102, the MPU 62 acquires the number of prize balls ICN paid out from the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command transmitted in step S301. Here, the number of winning balls ICN is the total number of winning balls paid out from the payout device 71 based on the winning ball command transmitted to the payout control device 70 in step S301 of the normal process this time. In other words, the prize ball number ICN is paid out to the payout device 71 in step S301 of the current normal process after the payout device 71 pays out the prize ball in step S301 of the previous normal process. The total number of prize balls. Specifically, the MPU 62 acquires the prize ball number ICN from the payout control device 70.

  In step S2103, the MPU 62 adds the prize ball number ICN acquired in step S2102 to the prize ball number counter IC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. The value of the winning ball counter IC is cleared when the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed.

  In step S2104, the MPU 62 acquires the number of game balls fired OCN fired by the game ball launching mechanism 81 in the game ball launch control process of step S306. Here, the number of shots OCN is the total number of game balls fired by the game ball launching mechanism 81 in step S306 of the current normal process. In other words, in step S306 of the previous normal process, the game ball launching mechanism 81 is fired by the game ball launching mechanism 81, and then the game ball launching mechanism 81 newly launched in the game ball launching mechanism 81 in step S306 of the current normal process. The total number. Specifically, the MPU 62 obtains the number of shots OCN by acquiring the total number of game balls that have entered the various winning ports and game balls that have entered the first out port 39a and the second out port 39b. get.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 joins the game balls that have entered the various winning holes and the game balls that have entered the first out port 39a and the second out port 39b to discharge them to the island of the game hall. It has a passage (not shown). The passage includes a detection sensor (not shown) that detects the number of game balls discharged. In the present embodiment, the MPU 62 acquires the number of shots OCN by acquiring the number of discharged game balls detected by the detection sensor.

  In the present embodiment, the MPU 62 obtains the number of shots OCN by obtaining the number of game balls discharged detected by a detection sensor provided in the passage for discharging the game balls to the island of the game hall. Was. On the other hand, for example, a detection sensor for detecting the number of game balls guided to the upper part of the game area by the guide rail 34 is provided in the game board 31D, and the MPU 62 is detected by this detection sensor. The number of shots OCN may be acquired by acquiring the number of game balls that have been played. In short, the MPU 62 only needs to be able to acquire the number of game balls fired OCN fired by the game ball launching mechanism 81 in the game ball launch control process of step S306.

  In step S2105, the MPU 62 adds the number-of-fires OCN acquired in step S2104 to the number-of-fires counter OC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. The value of the firing number counter OC is cleared when the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode is executed.

  In step S2106, the MPU 62 updates 1 by subtracting 1 from the value of the game times digestion counter PGC provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64. Here, the game times digest counter PGC is a counter that counts the number of game times digested while staying in the high frequency support mode. In this embodiment, when the MPU 62 shifts to the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the MPU 62 sets “50” to the game frequency digest counter PGC and stays in the high frequency support mode to digest the game times. Each time it is done, it is updated by subtracting 1 from the previous value.

In step S2107, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the game times digestion counter PGC is “0” or less. In other words, the MPU 62 determines whether or not 50 game times have been consumed after shifting to the high frequency support mode.
When the MPU 62 determines in step S2107 that the value of the game number digest counter PGC is not equal to or less than “0” (when it is determined that 50 game times have not been digested after entering the high frequency support mode). Finishes the payout rate calculation process without executing the processes after step S2108.

  On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S2107 that the value of the game number digest counter PGC is “0” or less (determined that 50 game times have been digested after entering the high frequency support mode). In step S2108, it is determined whether the payout rate BA is smaller than 0.9. Here, the payout rate BA is a value (BA = IC / OC) obtained by dividing the value of the prize ball number counter IC by the number of shots counter OC. Therefore, if the yield rate BA is smaller than 1 (less than 1), it means that the player's ball is decreasing, and if the yield rate BA is 1, the player's ball is increased or decreased. This means that the player's possession ball is increasing if the play rate BA is greater than one.

  As described above, the MPU 62 has the number of game balls fired toward the game area by the launch handle 27 (launch number counter OC) and the number of game balls awarded by the payout device 71 (award). Ball counter IC), and functions as a payout rate calculating means for calculating the game ball payout rate BA by dividing the number of game balls awarded by the number of game balls fired.

In step S2108, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the payout rate BA is smaller than 0.9, then clears the winning ball number counter IC and the firing number counter OC, and again returns to the game times digestion counter PGC. Set “50”. As a result, the MPU 62 can determine whether or not the payout rate BA is smaller than 0.9 in step S2108 every time it stays in the high frequency support mode and consumes 50 game times.
In this embodiment, the MPU 62 sets “50” in the game round digestion counter PGC, but other values may be set in the game round digestion counter PGC, which are randomly determined by lottery or the like. The value may be set in the game round digest counter PGC.

When the MPU 62 determines in step S2108 that the payout rate BA is not smaller than 0.9, the MPU 62 ends the payout rate calculation process without executing the processes in and after step S2109.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S2108 that the payout rate BA is smaller than 0.9, in step S2109, the MPU 62 sets the pushbutton valid flag in the RAM 64 and validates the pushbutton 25b. change. Further, the MPU 62 sets a button valid command in order to notify the player that the push button 25b has been validated. The MPU 62 transmits this button valid command to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the payout rate calculation process.
The sound emission control device 90 performs a predetermined process based on the button valid command transmitted from the MPU 62. This process will be described in detail later.

  As described above, when the MPU 62 determines that the push button 25b is valid and then determines that the push button 25b has been pressed, the MPU 62 sets the lower plate 481b to the open state and opens the lower plate. After the service period (5 sec) elapses, the lower plate 481b is set to the closed state again and the push button 25b is disabled. Accordingly, every time the MPU 62 stays in the high frequency support mode and consumes 50 game times, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the payout rate BA is smaller than 0.9 in step S2108, and the payout rate BA Is determined to be smaller than 0.9, the push button 25b can be effectively changed in step S2109.

  Further, when the lower plate 481b is set to the open state by the MPU 62, the holding unit 481 causes the game ball held in the holding space to enter the general winning opening 35D. Specifically, the holding device 48 is configured to be able to hold two game balls, and when the holding of the game ball by the holding device 48 is released, of the pending game balls (maximum of two) All the game balls are made to enter the general winning opening 35D. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 pays out 10 prize balls when a ball enters the general prize opening 35, so that, for example, 2 game balls on hold by the holding device 48 are stored. If it is, 20 payouts are paid out.

By the way, these 20 award balls stay in the high-frequency support mode, digest 50 game times, and the number of player's balls decreased when the payout rate BA is 0.9. It corresponds. In other words, when the player releases the holding of the game ball by the holding device 48, the player compensates for the lost ball by staying in the high-frequency support mode and digesting the 50 game times. The rate BA can be close to 1.
As described above, the number of game balls that can be held by the holding device 48 (two in the present embodiment), the value set to the game turnover counter PGC (50 in the present embodiment), and the value set in step S2108. The threshold value for the payout rate BA (0.9 in the present embodiment) is designed based on the output rate BA = 1, which means that the player's ball has not increased or decreased.

  In this embodiment, the MPU 62 clears the prize ball counter IC and the firing counter OC every time it stays in the high frequency support mode and consumes 50 game times, but it does not have to be cleared. Good. According to this, the MPU 62 can calculate the accumulation of the payout rate BA from the time when the mode is shifted to the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode is completed. Then, each time the MPU 62 stays in the high frequency support mode and digests 50 game times, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the accumulation of the payout rate BA is smaller than 0.9, and the payout rate BA is 0. If it is determined that it is smaller than .9, the push button 25b can be effectively changed in step S2109. Therefore, for example, staying in the high frequency support mode and staying in the high frequency support mode even when the payout rate BA when the game times of 51 to 100 times are digested is greater than 0.9. The MPU 62 can effectively change the push button 25b if the accumulation of the payout rate BA is less than 0.9 when the game times of 1 to 100 times are digested. When the game ball hold by 48 is released, it is possible to compensate for the lost ball by staying in the high-frequency support mode and digesting the game times, and to make the yield rate BA close to 1.

In the present embodiment, if the MPU 62 determines that 50 game times have been consumed after shifting to the high frequency support mode, whether or not the payout rate BA is smaller than 0.9 in step S2108. If it is determined in step S2108 that the payout rate BA is smaller than 0.9, in step S2109, the push button 25b is changed to valid by setting the push button valid flag in the RAM 64. Yes.
On the other hand, for example, the MPU 62 has transitioned to the high frequency support mode and before digesting 50 game times (for example, digesting 30 game times or 40 game times). Or the like), it may be determined whether or not the payout rate BA is smaller than 0.9, and the player may be notified of the possibility that the push button 25b is effectively changed. In this case, every time it is determined whether or not the payout rate BA is smaller than 0.9, a button validity suggestion command is set in order to notify the player that the push button 25b may be effectively changed. In step S301 of the normal process, the button validity suggesting command may be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Further, for example, the MPU 62 may notify the player of the transition of the relationship between the number of game times consumed and the payout rate BA as a graph.

  Therefore, the MPU 62 sets or clears the button valid flag (release setting) that defines whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding device 48 can be released by the push button 25b, and changes the push button 25b to valid or invalid. By this, it functions as a switching means for switching whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding device 48 can be released. Further, the MPU 62 switches whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding device 48 can be released based on the game ball payout rate BA calculated in the ball output rate calculation process.

  In this embodiment, the MPU 62 determines in step S2108 whether or not the payout rate BA is smaller than 0.9, and determines in step S2108 that the payout rate BA is smaller than 0.9. In this case, in step S2109, the push button valid flag is set in the RAM 64 to change the push button 25b to valid. On the other hand, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the payout rate BA is less than 1, and sets the push button valid flag in the RAM 64 when determining that the payout rate BA is less than 1. The push button 25b may be changed effectively. Further, for example, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the payout rate BA is 1 or more, and when it is determined that the payout rate BA is 1 or more, the push button valid flag is set in the RAM 64 and the push button 25b. May be effectively changed. In short, the relationship between the payout rate BA and the release setting of the push button 25b may be designed freely.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the MPU 62 can release the holding of the game ball by the holding device 48 by the push button 25b based on the game ball payout rate BA calculated in the game play rate calculation process of step S314D. Whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding device 48 can be released is changed by setting or clearing the button valid flag (release setting) that defines whether or not the push button 25b is changed to valid or invalid. . On the other hand, for example, the MPU 62 uses the holding device 48 based on the game ball payout rate BA calculated in the payout rate calculation process, regardless of whether or not the push button 25b is pressed. You may release the hold of the game ball. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 may not include the push button 25b. In short, the switching unit may switch whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding unit can be released.

  Further, in this embodiment, the MPU 62 sets or clears the button valid flag (release setting) that defines whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding device 48 can be released by the push button 25b, and activates the push button 25b. Alternatively, it is switched whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding device 48 can be canceled by changing to invalid. On the other hand, the MPU 62 may release the holding of the game ball by the holding device 48 based only on the determination that the pressing of the push button 25b is detected. In short, the switching unit may switch whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding unit can be released.

FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode.
In the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 executes steps S1101 to S1112 in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 49, the MPU 62 executes step S1102D instead of step S1102, and executes step S1110D instead of step S1110. In the present embodiment, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1106 that the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1102D onward. Then, the MPU 62 executes other steps as in the first embodiment.

In step S <b> 1101, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is “the most advantageous result” or “the explicit small round high-accuracy result”.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is the “most advantageous result” or the “explicit small round high-accuracy result”, the MPU 62 executes the processing after step S1102D.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the “most advantageous result” or the “explicit small round high-accuracy result”, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1105.

First, the processing (processing after step S1102D) when it is determined in step S1101 that the distribution result is the “most advantageous result” or the “explicit small round high-accuracy result” in the MPU 62 will be described.
In step S1102D, the MPU 62 sets the high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. If the high frequency support flag is already set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains this. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode. In step S1102D, the MPU 62 clears the winning ball number counter IC and the firing number counter OC, and sets “50” to the game times digestion counter PGC. The processes after step S1103 (steps S1103 and S1104) are the same as those in the first embodiment.

Next, a description will be given of processing (step S1105 and subsequent steps) when it is determined in step S1101 that the distribution result is not the “most advantageous result” or “explicit small round high-accuracy result” in the MPU 62.
In step S1105, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the distribution result is a “non-explicit small round high-accuracy result”.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the distribution result is the “inexplicit small round high-accuracy result”, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1106.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the distribution result is not the “inexplicitly small round high-accuracy result”, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1108 onward.

First, the processing (processing after step S1106) when it is determined in step S1105 that the distribution result is the “unspecified small round high-accuracy result” in the MPU 62 will be described.
In step S1106, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64.

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1106 that the high frequency support flag is set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1102D described above.
In contrast, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1106 that the high frequency support flag is not set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 sets the high probability mode flag in the RAM 64 in step S1107. If the high probability mode flag is already set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains this. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the success / failure lottery mode to the high probability mode. This high-probability mode continues until at least a “hit win” is made in the winning lottery. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode.

  Next, a process when the MPU 62 determines in step S1105 that the distribution result is not the “inexplicit small round high-accuracy result” (process after step S1108) will be described. The processes after step S1108 (steps S1108 to S1112) are the same as those in the first embodiment except for the process of step S1110D.

  In step S1110D, the MPU 62 sets a high frequency support flag in the RAM 64. If the high frequency support flag is already set in the RAM 64, the MPU 62 maintains this. As a result, the MPU 62 sets the support mode to the high frequency support mode. In step S1110D, the MPU 62 clears the winning ball number counter IC and the firing number counter OC, and sets “50” to the game times digestion counter PGC.

As described above, when the MPU 62 shifts to the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode is completed, the MPU 62 clears the prize ball number counter IC and the firing number counter OC and sets “50” to the game time digestion counter PGC. is doing.
In this embodiment, the MPU 62 sets “50” in the game round digestion counter PGC, but other values may be set in the game round digestion counter PGC, which are randomly determined by lottery or the like. The value may be set in the game round digest counter PGC.

<Regarding the effect determination process executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 50 shows a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process in order to execute an effect for game times, an effect for an opening / closing execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes Steps S1201 to S1215 periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) in substantially the same manner as in the first embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
Instead of step S1212 in the first embodiment, step S1212D is executed. In the present embodiment, the MPU 92 executes Steps S1216D to S1219D after executing Step S1214 and before executing Step S1215.

In step S1212D, the MPU 92 transmits an opening / closing execution mode command including information related to the opening / closing execution mode effect selected in step S1211 to the display control apparatus 100.
Based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out a data table for executing the effect for the opening / closing execution mode on the symbol display device 51 from the program ROM 103. The MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 51 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

Here, as described above, when it is determined in step S2108 of the payout rate calculation process that the payout rate BA is smaller than 0.9 (staying in the high frequency support mode and digesting 50 game times) When the player's ball has decreased at the time, the MPU 62 transmits a button valid command to the sound emission control device 90.
In view of this, the display control apparatus 100 selects the effects B to D as the effects for the opening / closing execution mode in step S1211 (when shifting to the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends), the high frequency support is performed. When the player has stayed in the mode and digested 50 game times, the lower plate 481b is set to the open state and it is determined whether or not the game balls held in the holding space are to enter the general winning opening 35D. The display control of the symbol display device 51 is executed so as to display an image for informing the player of this.

  In step S1216D, the MPU 92 determines whether a button valid command has been received. Here, the button valid command is 50 times when the MPU 62 determines that the payout rate BA is smaller than 0.9 in step S2108 of the payout rate calculation process, that is, stays in the high frequency support mode 50 times. Sent from the MPU 62 when the player's ball has decreased when the game times are digested.

  If the MPU 92 determines in step S1216D that the button valid command has been received, the MPU 92 executes button valid notification processing in step S1217D. In this button validity notification process, the MPU 92 notifies the player that the push button 25b has been activated. Specifically, the MPU 92 transmits a button validity notification command to the display control device 100 in order to notify the player that the push button 25b has been activated. At this time, the MPU 92 executes light emission control for the display lamp unit 23 and light emission control for turning on the light source built in the push button 25b, and also performs sound control for the speaker unit 24. Then, the display control device 100 controls the display of the symbol display device 51 so as to display an image for notifying the player that the push button 25b has been activated based on the button validity notification command transmitted from the MPU 92. Execute.

  In this embodiment, when the MPU 92 determines that the button valid command is received in step S1216D, the MPU 92 executes the button valid notification process in step S1217D. On the other hand, the MPU 92 determines its own payout rate based on various commands transmitted from the MPU 62 excluding the button valid command, a detection sensor provided in a passage for discharging the game ball to the island of the game hall, and the like. While calculating BA, it is determined whether or not the payout rate BA is smaller than 0.9, and if it is determined that the payout rate BA is smaller than 0.9, the button effective notification process is executed. Good. According to this, since the MPU 62 does not need to transmit the button valid command, the processing load on the MPU 62 can be reduced.

After executing the process of step S1217D or when determining that the button valid command is not received in step S1216D, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S1218D.
In step S1218D, the MPU 92 determines whether a hold release command has been received. Here, the hold release command is transmitted from the MPU 62 when the push button 25b is detected to be pressed by the MPU 62 after enabling the push button 25b in step S2109 of the payout rate calculation process.

  If the MPU 92 determines in step S1218D that it has received the hold release command, it executes hold release notification processing in step S1219D. In the hold release notification process, the MPU 92 notifies the player that the game ball held in the hold space is to enter the general winning opening 35D. Specifically, the MPU 92 transmits a hold release notification command to the display control device 100 in order to notify the player that the game ball held in the holding space is to enter the general winning opening 35D. At this time, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23, the light emission control for turning off the light source built in the push button 25b, and the sound control of the speaker unit 24. Then, the display control apparatus 100 displays an image for notifying the player that the game ball held in the holding space is to enter the general winning opening 35D based on the hold release notification command transmitted from the MPU 92. Display control of the symbol display device 51 is executed so as to display.

  After executing the process of step S1219D or when determining that the hold release command has not been received in step S1218D, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S1215 as in the first embodiment.

According to the present embodiment as described above, the following operations and effects can be achieved.
(1) Since the pachinko machine 10 includes the holding device 48 that holds the game ball entering the general winning opening 35D, the game ball flows down the game area and enters the general winning opening 35D. The holding device 48 is temporarily held. And since the pachinko machine 10 is provided with the switching means (MPU62) which switches whether the holding | maintenance of the game ball by the holding | maintenance apparatus 48 can be cancelled | released, the game ball which flows down the game area and enters into the general winning opening 35D Can be diversified. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.

(2) Since the pachinko machine 10 includes the push button 25b for releasing the holding of the game ball by the holding device 48 based on the operation of the player, the game ball is put into the general winning opening 35D at the timing intended by the player. You can enter. Further, the switching means sets or clears a button valid flag (release setting) that defines whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding device 48 can be released by the push button 25b, and changes the push button 25b to valid or invalid. Thus, the pachinko machine 10 switches whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding device 48 can be released, so that the pachinko machine 10 can set the timing at which the game ball can enter the general winning opening 35D regardless of the intention of the player. It can be set freely. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.

(3) The switching means switches whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding device 48 can be released based on the game ball payout rate BA calculated in the ball output rate calculation process in step S314D. Therefore, the player pays attention to the game ball payout rate BA, so that the player's attention to the game can be further improved.
(4) When the switching means determines that the game ball output rate BA calculated in the game output rate calculation process in step S314D is smaller than 0.9 (the game ball output rate BA is less than 1). In some cases, that is, when the player's possession ball is decreasing, switching is performed so that the retention of the game ball by the retention device 48 can be released, so the player can increase the decreased possession ball. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to further improve the player's attention to the game.

(5) When the holding device 48 releases the holding of the game ball by the holding device 48, all the game balls among the held game balls (maximum of two) are entered into the general winning opening 35D. A large amount of game balls can be paid out to the payout device 71 at a time. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to further improve the player's attention to the game.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment, and modifications, improvements, and the like within the scope that can achieve the object of the present invention are included in the present invention.
For example, in this embodiment, the holding device 48 is configured to be able to hold two game balls, and when the holding of the game ball by the holding device 48 is released, the game balls that are on hold (up to two) Among them, all the game balls are configured to enter the general winning opening 35D. On the other hand, the holding means is configured to be able to hold a plurality of game balls, and when the holding of the game balls by the holding means is released, one of the held game balls is inserted. The ball means may be configured to enter the ball. According to this, when the holding means releases the holding of the game ball by the holding means, one of the holding game balls is put into the entering means, so that it is divided into multiple times. The game ball can be paid out to the payout device. Therefore, the gaming machine can further improve the degree of attention of the player to the game. In this case, the number of times that the holding of the game ball by the holding means may be randomly determined by lottery or the like.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding device 48 can be released by the push button 25b based on the game ball payout rate BA calculated by the game payout rate calculation process. It functions as a switching means for switching whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding device 48 can be released by setting or clearing the button valid flag (cancellation setting) that regulates and changing the push button 25b to valid or invalid. It was. On the other hand, the switching unit may switch whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding unit can be canceled based on the game ball output rate without calculating the game ball output rate. This also applies to other embodiments described later.

For example, the MPU 62 may switch whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding device 48 can be released based on the open / closed state of the electric accessory 37a.
Specifically, the MPU 62 sets a button valid flag (release setting) that specifies whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding device 48 can be released by the push button 25b when the electric accessory 37a is set in the closed state. When the push button 25b is effectively changed and the electric accessory 37a is set to the open state, the button valid that determines whether or not the hold of the game ball by the holding device 48 can be released by the push button 25b. It may be switched whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding device 48 can be released by clearing the flag (release setting) and invalidating the push button 25b.

  Further, the MPU 62 measures a period during which the electric accessory 37a is set in a closed state, and the period is a predetermined time (for example, a ball yield rate BA = meaning that the player's ball has not increased or decreased) A button valid flag (cancellation setting) that specifies whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding device 48 can be released by the push button 25b when it is determined that it is longer than the time (designed based on 1). When the push button 25b is changed to be valid and it is determined that the period is shorter than the predetermined time, the button valid flag that defines whether or not the hold of the game ball by the holding device 48 can be released by the push button 25b. It may be switched whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding device 48 can be released by clearing (release setting) and changing the push button 25b to be invalid.

Here, the open / closed state of the electric accessory 37a is correlated with the game ball payout rate. That is, when the period when the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a in the closed state is long, the probability that the game ball will win the upper operating port 36 is higher than the lower operating port 37. When the period when the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a in the closed state is short, the game ball is likely to win the lower operation port 37, and the payout rate is increased.
Therefore, the MPU 62 switches whether or not the game ball can be held by the holding device 48 based on the open / closed state of the electric accessory 37a, thereby calculating the game ball payout rate. Based on the payout rate, it is possible to switch whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding device 48 can be released.
In short, the switching means is based on the game payout rate by changing the release setting that specifies whether or not the release of the game ball held by the hold means can be released by the release device, by enabling or disabling the hold means. What is necessary is just to switch whether the holding | maintenance of a game ball can be cancelled | released.

FIG. 51 is a diagram showing an example in which a holding device is provided in the vicinity of the through gate.
Further, in the present embodiment, the game ball payout rate BA is not associated with the ease of storing the game balls held by the holding device 48, but these may be associated.
Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 51, the game board 31Z includes a holding device 48Z provided in the vicinity of the through gate 41 and a general winning opening 35Z provided below the holding device 48Z (holding means). And may be provided.

  The general winning opening 35Z has the same function as the general winning opening 35D in the present embodiment except for the arrangement position thereof. Specifically, the general winning opening 35Z includes a detection sensor 50a (see FIG. 43) that detects the entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 50a is disposed on the back side of the game board 31Z. Note that the pachinko machine 10 pays out 10 prize balls when a ball enters the general prize opening 35Z.

The holding device 48Z is provided above the general winning opening 35Z, and includes a holding section 481Z that holds a game ball entering the general winning opening 35Z.
The holding section 481Z has an entrance formed upward to allow a game ball to enter, and an exit formed downward to allow the game ball entered from this entrance to fall toward the general winning opening 35Z. The passage is provided on the left side of the through gate 41. Further, this passage is provided with a left wall portion 481LZ disposed on the left side of the self and a right wall portion 481RZ disposed on the right side of the self and having an upper end set lower than an upper end of the left wall portion 481LZ. And. Note that the left wall portion 481LZ and the left wall portion 481LZ are formed of a plurality of nails.

The retaining portion 481Z includes an upper plate 481a provided from the upper end position of the left wall portion 481LZ to the upper end position of the right wall portion 481RZ, a lower plate 481b provided below the upper plate 481a, an upper plate 481a and a lower plate 481a. And a plate driver 481c for driving the plate 481b.
Therefore, the reservation part 481Z has the same function as the reservation part 481 in this embodiment except for the left wall part 481LZ and the left wall part 481LZ.

Of the many nails 44 planted in the vicinity of the through gate 41 and the holding device 48Z, the nail 44z provided between the through gate 41 and the holding device 48Z is used to place a game ball in either the through gate 41 or the holding device 48Z. It functions as a sorting means for sorting and entering balls.
Specifically, the game ball that has passed the left side of the nail 44z falls toward the holding device 48Z, and the game ball that has passed the right side of the nail 44z falls toward the through gate 41. Therefore, by setting the nail 44z so that the game ball falling toward the nail 44z can easily pass through the left side of the nail 44z, the nail 44z distributes the game ball to the holding device 48Z and enters the ratio. In addition to the increase, it is possible to reduce the rate at which game balls are distributed to the through gates 41 and entered (first state). In addition, by setting the nail 44z so that the game ball falling toward the nail 44z can easily pass through the right side of the nail 44z, the nail 44z distributes the game ball to the through gate 41 to enter the ball. In addition to the increase, it is possible to reduce the rate at which the game balls are distributed to the holding device 48Z to enter (second state).
In other words, the nail 44z switches the setting between the first state and the second state, thereby distributing the game balls to the holding device 48Z, and distributing the game balls to the through gates 41. It is configured to be able to set the ratio of entering the ball.

Here, when the result of the internal lottery executed with the winning of each through gate 41 as a trigger is a result corresponding to the transition to the electric combination open state, the electric combination 37a is opened in a predetermined manner. It becomes a state. In addition, as described above, the open / close state of the electric accessory 37a is correlated with the game ball payout rate.
Therefore, when the nail 44z is set so that the game ball falling toward the nail 44z can easily pass through the right side of the nail 44z, the period during which the MPU 62 sets the electric accessory 37a in the closed state is as follows. Shorter and higher game balls. Then, when the game ball falling rate is set high by setting the nail 44z so that the game ball falling toward the nail 44z easily passes the right side of the nail 44z, the game ball is held. It becomes difficult to accumulate in the device 48Z.

  On the other hand, when the nail 44z is set so that the game ball falling toward the nail 44z can easily pass through the left side of the nail 44z, the electric accessory 37a is set in the closed state by the MPU 62. The period during which the game ball is played becomes longer, and the play rate of game balls is lowered. When the game ball falling rate is set low by setting the nail 44z so that the game ball falling toward the nail 44z can easily pass the left side of the nail 44z, the game ball is held. It becomes easy to accumulate in the device 48Z.

As described above, when the game ball payout rate is set high by associating the game ball payout rate BA with the ease of storing the game balls held by the hold device 48Z, the game balls are stored in the hold device 48Z. If the game ball payout rate is set low, the game balls may be easily stored in the holding device 48Z.
According to this, by releasing the holding of the game ball by the holding device 48Z, the player can increase the holding ball, so that the game ball falling toward the nail 44z passes the left side of the nail 44z. Even when the nail 44z is set so as to facilitate the game (when the game ball payout rate is set low), the player can comfortably play the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding device 48 can be released by the push button 25b based on the game ball payout rate BA calculated by the game payout rate calculation process. It functions as a switching means for switching whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding device 48 can be released by setting or clearing the button valid flag (cancellation setting) that regulates and changing the push button 25b to valid or invalid. It was. On the other hand, whether or not the switching means can release the holding of the game ball by the holding means by the release device based on a different standard from the game ball payout ratio calculated by the ball output rate calculating means. It may be switched whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding means can be released by changing the release setting that defines the above to valid or invalid.

  Specifically, for example, the switching means is provided in the game area formed on the game board and is connected to the operation ports (upper operation port 36 and lower operation port 37) for entering the game balls flowing down the game region. Based on the result of the internal lottery triggered by the entry, the release setting that defines whether or not the game ball can be held by the holding means can be changed to valid or invalid. For example, the MPU 62 sets the button valid flag (cancellation setting) and changes the push button 25b to be valid when the result of the success / failure lottery is “ordinary failure result” and the reach lottery is won. The push button 25b may be changed to be valid by setting a button valid flag (release setting) in accordance with the display duration set when the reach generation lottery is won. According to this, the switching means sets a release setting that specifies whether or not the release device can release the hold of the game ball by the hold means based on the result of the internal lottery triggered by entering the operation port. Since it is changed to valid or invalid, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the game ball can enter the ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can further improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

  In addition, for example, the gaming machine is provided in a gaming area formed on a gaming board of another gaming machine different from the gaming machine, and enters the operation port for entering a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area. The other means result acquisition means for acquiring the result of the internal lottery triggered by the, the switching means cancels the holding of the game ball by the holding means based on the result of the internal lottery acquired by the other machine result acquisition means You may change the cancellation | release setting which prescribes | regulates whether it can cancel | release with an apparatus to effective or invalid. For example, the pachinko machine 10 is a pachinko machine other than the pachinko machine 10 (a pachinko machine installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 10 on an island of a game hall constructed by arranging a plurality of pachinko machines in parallel. The result of the internal lottery triggered by the entry to the operating port of the device etc. is acquired via the network (other machine result acquisition means), and the button valid flag (release setting) is set based on the result of this internal lottery. The push button 25b may be set to valid or invalid by setting or clearing. For example, when another pachinko machine wins the big hit lottery, the button valid flag (release setting) is set and the push button 25b is made valid. It may be changed. According to this, the switching means sets a release setting that specifies whether or not the release device can release the hold of the game ball by the hold means based on the result of the internal lottery acquired by the other machine result acquisition means. Since it is changed to valid or invalid, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the game ball can enter the ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can further improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

[Sixth Embodiment]
The sixth embodiment of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.
In the following description, parts that have already been described are assigned the same reference numerals and description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 52 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the variable prize apparatus according to the sixth embodiment of the present invention.
In the fifth embodiment, the gaming board 31D includes a variable winning device 38 provided on the lower right side of the gaming area, a second out port 39b provided on the right side of the variable winning device 38, the variable winning device 38, and And a game ball holding mechanism 40 provided between the second out ports 39b.
On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52, the game board 31E is provided between the variable winning device 38, the second out port 39b, and the variable winning device 38 and the second out port 39b. The fifth embodiment is different from the fifth embodiment in that the holding device 49 and a general winning opening 35E provided below the holding device 49 are provided, and the game ball holding mechanism 40 is not provided.

  The general winning opening 35E has the same function as the general winning opening 35D in the fifth embodiment except for the arrangement position thereof. Specifically, the general winning opening 35E includes a detection sensor 50n (see FIG. 53) that detects the entry of a game ball, and this detection sensor 50n is disposed on the back side of the game board 31E. Note that the pachinko machine 10 pays out 10 prize balls when a ball enters the general prize opening 35E.

The holding device 49 includes a holding unit 491 that holds a game ball entering the general winning opening 35E.
The holding unit 491 has an entrance formed upward to allow a game ball to enter, and an exit formed downward to allow the game ball entered from this entrance to fall toward the general winning opening 35E. A passage having In addition, the passage extends downward from the entrance, then bends to the left, and extends so as to descend toward the exit. The game ball that has entered the entrance of the passage falls downward from the entrance and then travels along the top surface of the slope toward the exit using the slope of the passage.
The holding portion 491 includes an upper plate 491a provided adjacent to the open / close door 38b, a lower plate 491b provided on the lower left side of the upper plate 491a, and a plate driving unit that drives the upper plate 491a and the lower plate 491b. 491c.

  The upper plate 491a is provided on the game board 31E so as to close the entrance of the holding portion 491. Further, the upper plate 491a is provided to be inclined so as to descend from the side of the special winning opening 38a toward the second out port 39b. The upper plate 491a moves forward toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31E, thereby closing the entrance of the holding portion 491 and moving backward toward the inside of the game board 31E. It has an open state in which the entrance of the holding part 491 is opened by being buried in the wall.

The lower plate 491b is provided on the game board 31E so as to close the outlet of the holding portion 491. The lower plate 491b moves forward toward the window panel 22 and protrudes from the game board 31E, thereby closing the outlet of the holding portion 491 and moving backward toward the inside of the game board 31E. It has the open state which opens the exit of the reservation part 491 by being buried in.
The plate driving unit 491c drives the upper plate 491a and the lower plate 491b to set the plates 491a and 491b to either the open state or the closed state.

Here, when the plates 491a and 491b are both set in a closed state, a storage space defined by the plates 491a and 491b can be formed in the passage of the storage portion 491. This holding space has an area that can hold eight game balls.
Accordingly, the holding unit 491 can set the upper plate 491a in the open state and the lower plate 491b in the closed state, thereby allowing the game ball that has passed the right side of the nail 44a to enter the holding space. The holding unit 491 includes a detection sensor 50o (see FIG. 53) that detects the entry of the eighth game ball. The detection sensor 50o is disposed on the back side of the game board 31E. It is arranged at a position corresponding to the first game ball. Note that the pachinko machine 10 does not perform the payout of the prize ball when the entry into the holding unit 491 occurs, unlike the case where the entry into various winning openings occurs.

  In the present embodiment, the holding unit 491 includes the detection sensor 50o that detects the entry of the eighth game ball. However, for example, the first to eighth game balls may be entered. Eight detection sensors for detecting each may be provided. In this case, each detection sensor may be disposed on the back side of the game board and at a position corresponding to the first to eighth game balls. In short, the reservation unit 491 only needs to be able to detect that eight game balls have entered the reservation space.

  In addition, the holding unit 491 moves the upper plate 491a after the eight game balls have entered the holding space, that is, after the detection sensor 50o detects the eighth game ball entering the holding space. By setting the closed state, it is possible to prevent the game ball flowing down toward the holding portion 491 from entering the holding space. Here, the game ball that has passed the right side of the nail 44a flows down toward the holding portion 491, and then enters the second out port 39b along the upper surface of the upper plate 491a using the inclination of the upper plate 491a. . That is, the holding unit 491 can cause the game ball to enter the holding space when the game ball is distributed to the second out port 39b by the nail 44a. Further, when the upper plate 491a is set to the closed state and then the lower plate 491b is set to the open state, the holding unit 491 can drop the game ball held in the holding space and enter the general winning opening 35E. .

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the big winning opening 38a is a ball entry means provided in the game area for entering the game ball, and an advantageous result (a payout of the prize ball can be received). It functions as a first entry means that is given to the player when entering the ball. In addition, the second out port 39b is a ball entry means provided in the game area for entering a game ball, and has a disadvantageous result than the advantageous result given by the first ball entry means ( Functioning as a second entry means for giving a player a prize when a game ball is entered. Then, the general winning opening 35E functions as a distribution ball means for entering a game ball when the game balls are distributed to the second ball entry means by the distribution means.

  In the present embodiment, the retaining portion 491 includes an upper plate 491a and a lower plate 491b, and the game ball that has passed through the right side of the nail 44a flows down toward the retaining portion 491, and then the upper plate 491a is inclined. Was used to enter the second out port 39b along the upper surface of the upper plate 491a. On the other hand, the holding | maintenance part 491 does not need to be provided with the upper plate 491a. In this case, after the game ball that has passed through the right side of the nail 44a flows down toward the holding portion 491, the game ball enters the second out port 39b through the upper part of the game ball that has entered the holding space. What is necessary is just to adjust the space | interval of the entrance of the holding | maintenance part 491, and the lower plate 491b.

FIG. 53 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine.
In the fifth embodiment, the input port of the MPU 62 is connected to the plurality of detection sensors 50a to 50g and 50m.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the input port of the MPU 62 is different from the fifth embodiment in that it is connected to a plurality of detection sensors 50a to 50g, 50m, and 50n, as shown in FIG.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, the input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the detection sensors 50h to 50j, and the output port is connected to the plate driving unit 401c and the guide member driving unit 402e.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the input port of the MPU 92 is connected to the detection sensor 50o, and the output port is different from the fifth embodiment in that it is connected to the plate driving unit 491c.

  In the present embodiment, the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100 execute processing different from that in the fifth embodiment. Specifically, in the present embodiment, each process of the big prize opening / closing process, the big prize opening opening process, and the effect determination process is different from the fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, the contents of each process in this embodiment will be described in order.

Here, as in the fifth embodiment, the MPU 62 executes the process of step S408 or step S410 of the main process, and then in step S411, controls the sub-side control board (such as the sound emission control board 91). Send initial command.
By receiving the initial command transmitted in step S411, the sub-side control board recognizes that communication with the main control board 61 is normally performed, and executes predetermined processing. Specifically, for example, the sound emission control board 91 executes the operation confirmation of the holding device 49 by driving the upper plate 491a and the lower plate 491b by the plate driving unit 491c. In addition, the sound emission control board 91 sets the upper plate 491a and the lower plate 491b in a closed state by driving the upper plate 491a and the lower plate 491b by the plate driving unit 491c after performing the operation check of the holding device 49. To do.

  Here, the MPU 92 executes the drive control of the plate driving unit 491c, thereby repeatedly setting the upper plate 491a and the lower plate 491b to the open state and the closed state, and confirming the operation of the holding device 49. The game balls on hold at 49 (game balls that have already entered the holding unit 491 before the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on) enter the general winning opening 35E. At this time, when the payout device 71 executes the payout of the prize ball, the game hall manager uses the game ball paid out by the payout device 71 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. The work will be time consuming.

  Therefore, the MPU 92 performs an operation check of the holding device 49 before the dispensing device 71 becomes operable. According to this, the MPU 92 does not cause the payout device 71 to pay out the winning ball even when the game ball being held by the holding device 49 enters the general winning opening 35E when the operation of the holding device 49 is confirmed. Can be. Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the payout device 71 does not pay out the prize ball, so that the manager of the game hall does not have to collect the game ball from the pachinko machine 10, and The burden can be reduced.

  In this embodiment, the MPU 92 performs an operation check of the holding device 49 before the payout device 71 becomes operable, so that the game being held by the holding device 49 when the operation of the holding device 49 is confirmed. Even when the ball enters the general winning opening 35E, the payout device 71 is prevented from executing the payout of the winning ball. On the other hand, for example, the MPU 92 performs an operation check of the holding device 49 before the detection sensor 50n becomes operable, so that the game held by the holding device 49 when the operation of the holding device 49 is confirmed. Even when the ball enters the general winning opening 35E, the payout device 71 may not be made to perform the payout of the winning ball. In short, the MPU 92 prevents the payout device 71 from paying out the winning ball even when the game ball being held by the holding device 49 enters the general winning opening 35E when confirming the operation of the holding device 49. I can do it.

  In this embodiment, the MPU 92 pays out a prize ball to the payout device 71 even when a game ball being held by the holding device 49 enters the general winning opening 35E when the operation of the holding device 49 is confirmed. I tried not to let it run. On the other hand, from the viewpoint that the game ball that is being held by the holding device 49 is originally a game ball that should be paid out from the pachinko machine 10, the MPU 92 checks the operation of the holding device 49. When the game ball on hold enters the general winning opening 35E, the payout device 71 may be made to pay out the winning ball.

FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the special prize opening / closing process.
In the big prize opening / closing process, the MPU 62 executes steps S901 to S924 in substantially the same manner as in the fifth embodiment. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, the MPU 62 performs step S914 (when the MPU 62 determines that the value of the round counter RC is “0”), step S922 (when the MPU 62 determines the round counter RC). Step S924 (when the MPU 62 determines that the value of the open / close counter SOC is “0”) S925E is executed.

In step S901, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the special winning opening 38a is being opened.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the special winning opening 38a is not being opened, the MPU 62 executes processing in step S902 and subsequent steps.
On the other hand, when the MPU 62 determines in step S901 that the special winning opening 38a is being opened, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S906.

First, the processing (processing after step S902) when it is determined in step S901 that the MPU 62 does not open the special prize opening 38a will be described.
In step S902, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the open / close counter SOC is “0” and the value of the round counter RC is “0”.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that both the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC are “0”, the MPU 62 ends the big prize opening / closing process.

In contrast, if the MPU 62 determines in step S902 that at least one of the value of the open / close counter SOC and the value of the round counter RC is not “0”, the value of the timer counter T is determined in step S903. Is determined to be “0”.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the value of the timer counter T is not “0”, the MPU 62 ends the big prize opening / closing process.

On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S903 that the value of the timer counter T is “0”, the MPU 62 executes a big prize opening release process in step S904.
Hereinafter, the special winning opening opening process in step S904 will be described in detail.

FIG. 55 is a view showing a flowchart of the special winning opening releasing process.
In the special prize opening process, the MPU 62 executes steps S1001 to S1009 in substantially the same manner as in the fifth embodiment. In this embodiment, the MPU 62 executes steps S1010E and S1011E instead of steps S1006 and S1007 as shown in FIG.

In step S <b> 1001, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the result is “special outage result”.
If the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the result is “special loss result”, the MPU 62 executes the processing from step S1002. Note that the processing after Step S1002 (Steps S1002 to S1009) is the same as that in the fifth embodiment.

  On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1001 that the result is not “special outage result”, the MPU 62 sets “8” to the winning counter PC in step S1004, and in step S1005, the distribution result. Is a small round high-accuracy result (“inexplicit small round high-precision result” or “explicit small round high-precision result”).

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1005 that the distribution result is a low-round high-accuracy result, the MPU 62 executes processing in step S1003 and subsequent steps. The processes after step S1003 (steps S1003 and S1009) are the same as those in the fifth embodiment.
On the other hand, if the MPU 62 determines in step S1005 that the distribution result is not a small round high-accuracy result, in step S1010E, the MPU 62 determines whether or not the value of the round counter RC is “14”. .

If the MPU 62 determines in step S1010E that the value of the round counter RC is “14”, the MPU 62 sets a hold start command in step S1011E. Further, the MPU 62 transmits the hold start command set in step S1011E to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the MPU 62 determines that the value of the round counter RC is “14” based on the hold start command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process. . This process will be described in detail later.
Here, when it is determined in step S1010E that the value of the round counter RC is “14”, this means that the round game is the second round game (2R round).

  After executing the process of step S1011E or when it is determined in step S1010E that the value of the round counter RC is not “14”, the MPU 62 executes the processes after step S1008. The processes after step S1008 (steps S1008 and S1009) are the same as those in the fifth embodiment.

Returning to the description of the big prize opening / closing process, the processes after step S905 will be described with reference to FIG.
The MPU 62 sets the release command in step S905 after executing the special winning opening release process in step S904. Further, the MPU 62 transmits the release command set in step S905 to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process. Thereafter, the MPU 62 ends the special prize opening / closing process.
The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the open / close door 38b is set to the open state based on the open command transmitted from the MPU 62, and executes a predetermined process.

  Next, a process when the MPU 62 determines that the special winning opening 38a is being opened in the step S901 (the process after the step S906) will be described. Note that the processing after Step S906 (Steps S906 to S924) is the same as that of the fifth embodiment except Step S925E as described above.

  The MPU 62 performs step S914 (when the MPU 62 determines that the value of the round counter RC is “0”), and step S922 (when the MPU 62 determines that the value of the round counter RC is “0”). , And step S924 (when the MPU 62 determines that the value of the open / close counter SOC is “0”), step S925E is executed.

In step S925E, the MPU 62 sets a hold end command. Further, the MPU 62 transmits the hold end command set in step S925E to the sound emission control device 90 in step S301 of the normal process.
Here, if the MPU 62 determines that the value of the round counter RC or the open / close counter SOC is “0”, it means that the last round game has ended.
Note that the sound emission control device 90 executes a predetermined process based on the hold end command transmitted from the MPU 62. This process will be described in detail later.

<Regarding the effect determination process executed by the sound emission control device 90>
FIG. 56 shows a flowchart of the effect determination process.
The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 executes an effect determination process in order to execute an effect for game times, an effect for an opening / closing execution mode, and the like. In this effect determination process, the MPU 92 executes steps S1201 to S1215 regularly (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec), as in the fifth embodiment. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG.
Instead of steps S1213 and S1214 in the fifth embodiment, steps S1220E to S1223E are executed. In the present embodiment, the MPU 92 executes steps S1212E and S1219E instead of steps S1212D and S1219D in the fifth embodiment.

In step S1212E, the MPU 92 transmits an opening / closing execution mode command including information related to the opening / closing execution mode effect selected in step S1211 to the display control device 100.
Based on the opening / closing execution mode command transmitted from the MPU 92, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out a data table for executing the effect for the opening / closing execution mode on the symbol display device 51 from the program ROM 103. The MPU 102 outputs a command to the VDP 105 based on this data table every time a predetermined image update timing (for example, 20 msec cycle) is reached. As a result, the symbol display device 51 executes the effect for the opening / closing execution mode selected by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90.

Here, as described above, when it is determined in step S2108 of the payout rate calculation process that the payout rate BA is smaller than 0.9 (staying in the high frequency support mode and digesting 50 game times) When the player's ball has decreased at the time, the MPU 62 transmits a button valid command to the sound emission control device 90.
In view of this, the display control apparatus 100 selects the effects B to D as the effects for the opening / closing execution mode in step S1211 (when shifting to the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends), the high frequency support is performed. Whether or not the game balls held in the holding space by setting the lower plates 481b and 491b to the open state when entering the game mode and digesting 50 game times enter the general winning openings 35D and 35E Display control of the symbol display device 51 is executed so as to display an image for informing the player that the determination is made.

Further, as described above, when it is determined that the round counter RC value is “14” in step S1010E of the big prize opening process (the distribution result is “the most advantageous result” or “the low probability result”). If there is, the MPU 62 transmits a hold start command to the sound emission control device 90.
Therefore, when the effects C and D are selected as the effects for the opening / closing execution mode in step S1211, the display control apparatus 100 (when the distribution result is the “most advantageous result” or the “low probability result”), The display control of the symbol display device 51 is executed so as to display an image for notifying the player that the game ball should be entered into the holding device 49 in the round game after the second round.

In step S1220E, the MPU 92 determines whether a hold start command has been received. Here, the hold start command is transmitted from the MPU 62 when it is determined that the value of the round counter RC is “14” in step S1010E of the big prize opening process.
If the MPU 92 determines in step S1220E that a hold start command has been received, the MPU 92 executes upper plate opening processing in step S1221E. In this upper plate opening process, the MPU 92 sets the upper plate 491a in an open state by executing drive control of the plate driving unit 491c.

  Here, as described above, when it is determined that the value of the round counter RC is “14” in step S1010E of the big prize opening process, the round game is the second round game (2Rth game). ). Further, since the lower plate 491b is set in the closed state, the game ball that has passed the right side of the nail 44a can enter the holding portion 491 by setting the upper plate 491a in the open state.

In the present embodiment, the MPU 92 sets the upper plate 491a to the open state at the 2R, and allows the game ball that has passed the right side of the nail 44a to enter the holding portion 491. The upper plate 491a may be set to the open state, or the upper plate 491a may be set to the open state at other timing such as an opening standby time or an ending standby time. Further, the upper plate 491a may be set in an open state a plurality of times during one opening / closing execution mode, and the upper plate 491a may be set in an open state a plurality of times during one round game.
In the present embodiment, the MPU 92 sets the upper plate 491a to the open state during the opening / closing execution mode, and allows the game ball that has passed the right side of the nail 44a to enter the holding unit 491. For example, the upper plate 491a may be set to the open state at another timing such as during the execution of the game times control process.

After executing the process of step S1221E or when determining that the hold start command has not been received in step S1220E, the MPU 92 executes the process after step S1222E.
In step S1222E, the MPU 92 determines whether or not a hold end command has been received, and whether or not the number of game balls held in the hold unit 491 has reached the upper limit (eight in this embodiment). That is, it is determined whether or not the hold limit has been reached. Here, the hold end command executes any one of steps S914, S922, and S924 of the big prize opening / closing process, and the value of the round counter RC or the opening / closing counter SOC is “0” in the MPU 62. (When it is determined at the MPU 62 that the last round game has ended), the MPU 62 transmits the message at step S925E. Further, the MPU 92 determines whether or not the detection sensor 50o corresponding to the holding device 49 has detected the entry of a game ball (whether or not the eighth game ball has entered the hold device 49). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls held in the holding unit 491 has reached the upper limit.

  If the MPU 92 determines that the hold end command has been received in step S1222E, or if it is determined that the hold limit has been reached, the MPU 92 executes the upper plate closing process in step S1223E. In the upper plate closing process, the MPU 92 sets the upper plate 491a in a closed state by executing drive control of the plate driving unit 491c. Since the lower plate 491b is set in a closed state, the holding unit 491 can hold a game ball in the holding space by setting the upper plate 491a in a closed state.

  In this way, the MPU 92 sets the upper plate 491a to the open state at the start of the second round game, and sets the upper plate 491a to the closed state at the end of the last round game. In addition, when the number of game balls held in the holding unit 491 reaches the upper limit between the start of the second round game and the end of the last round game, the MPU 92 The upper plate 491a is set in a closed state without waiting for the game to end.

  After executing the process of step S1223E or when making a negative determination in step S1222E (when it is determined that the hold end command has not been received or when the hold limit has not been reached), the MPU 92 performs step The processing after S1216D is executed. Note that the processing in steps S1216D and 1217D is the same as that in the fifth embodiment.

After executing the process of step S1217D or when determining that the button valid command is not received in step S1216D, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S1218D.
In step S1218D, the MPU 92 determines whether a hold release command has been received. Here, the hold release command is transmitted from the MPU 62 when the push button 25b is detected to be pressed by the MPU 62 after enabling the push button 25b in step S2109 of the payout rate calculation process.

  If the MPU 92 determines in step S1218D that a hold release command has been received, the MPU 92 executes hold release notification processing in step S1219E. In this hold release notification process, the MPU 92 sets the lower plate 491b to an open state by executing drive control of the plate drive unit 491c, and after the lower plate release period (5 sec) has elapsed, Set to closed again.

  Thereby, the holding unit 491 causes the game balls held in the holding space to enter the general winning opening 35E. Specifically, the holding device 49 is configured to be able to hold eight game balls, and when the holding of the game balls by the holding device 49 is released, among the pending game balls (maximum eight) All the game balls are made to enter the general winning opening 35E. In other words, the period for opening the lower plate is set to a period sufficient for dropping eight game balls to enter the general winning opening 35E.

In this embodiment, the MPU 92 sets the lower plate 491b to the open state, and sets the lower plate 491b to the closed state again after the lower plate opening period (5 sec) has elapsed. On the other hand, the holding unit 491 includes a detection sensor that detects the entry of the first game ball, and the MPU 92 enters the holding unit 491 based on the detection result of the detection sensor. The lower plate 491b may be set to the closed state again when it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the holding portion 491.
Further, in the present embodiment, the holding device 49 is configured to hold eight game balls, but may be configured to hold one game ball, and the number may be different from eight. A plurality of game balls may be held.

  Further, in the hold release notification process, the MPU 92 notifies the player that the game ball held in the hold space is to enter the general winning opening 35D, 35E. Specifically, the MPU 92 transmits a hold release notification command to the display control device 100 in order to notify the player that a game ball held in the holding space is to enter the general winning opening 35D, 35E. . At this time, the MPU 92 executes the light emission control of the display lamp unit 23, the light emission control for turning off the light source built in the push button 25b, and the sound control of the speaker unit 24. Then, the display control device 100 notifies the player that the game ball held in the holding space is to be entered into the general winning opening 35D, 35E based on the hold release notification command transmitted from the MPU 92. Display control of the symbol display device 51 is executed so as to display an image.

Here, in step S101D of the timer interrupt process, the MPU 62 executes the reading process of the plurality of detection sensors 50a to 50g, 50m and the reading process of the detection sensor 50n corresponding to the general winning opening 35E. In this reading process, the MPU 62 reads the states of the plurality of detection sensors 50a to 50g, 50m, and 50n, determines the states, and stores them in the RAM 64 as winning detection information. When the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensors 50a to 50d, 50n corresponding to the various winning openings detect the winning of the game ball, the MPU 62 sets a prize ball command for instructing the payout of the prize ball. The set command is transmitted to the payout control device 70. For example, when the MPU 62 determines that the detection sensor 50n corresponding to the general winning opening 35E detects a winning of a game ball, the MPU 62 issues a winning ball command for instructing ten winning balls. Send to.
The payout control device 70 performs payout control for causing the payout device 71 to pay out a prize ball based on a prize ball command transmitted from the MPU 62.

  After executing the process of step S1219E or when determining that the hold release command has not been received in step S1218D, the MPU 92 executes the processes after step S1215 as in the fifth embodiment.

According to the present embodiment as described above, the following operations and effects can be achieved.
(1) Since the pachinko machine 10 includes the holding devices 48 and 49 for holding the game balls entering the general winning ports 35D and 35E, the game balls flow down the game area and flow into the general winning ports 35D and 35D. When entering the ball 35E, the ball is temporarily held by the holding devices 48 and 49. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the paths of game balls that flow down the game area and enter the general winning openings 35D and 35E. In addition, the general winning opening 35E allows a game ball to enter when the game ball is distributed to the second out port 39b by the nail 44a, so that many game balls are distributed to the second out port 39b. When 44a is set, a larger number of game balls can be held by the holding device 49 than when the nail 44a is set so as to distribute many game balls to the special winning opening 38a. Then, by releasing the holding of the game ball by the holding device 49, the player can increase the holding ball. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.

(2) The nail 44a is set by switching between the first state and the second state, thereby distributing the game balls to the big winning opening 38a and entering the game balls into the second out port 39b. It is possible to set the ratio of entering and placing the ball. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the configuration of the distribution means can be simplified.
(3) The general winning opening 35E causes a game ball to enter when a game ball is distributed to the second out port 39b by the nail 44a, so that a large number of game balls are distributed to the second out port 39b. When the nail 44a is set, a larger number of game balls can be held by the holding device 49 than when the nail 44a is set so as to distribute many game balls to the special winning opening 38a. Then, by releasing the holding of the game ball by the holding device 49, the player can increase the holding ball, so when the nail 44a is set so as to distribute many game balls to the second out port 39b Even so, the player can play comfortably. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player can comfortably play the game without reducing the degree of freedom of setting the nail 44a, and the player's attention to the game is improved. Can do.

(4) Since the holding device 49 is provided between the big winning opening 38a and the second out opening 39b, the player wins more than whether the game ball enters the second out opening 39b or not. It becomes easy to pay attention to whether or not a game ball enters the mouth 38a and the holding device 49. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the player can comfortably play the game without reducing the degree of freedom of setting the nail 44a, and the player's attention to the game is improved. Can do.
(5) The pachinko machine 10 includes switching means (MPU 62) for switching whether or not the holding of the game balls by the holding devices 48 and 49 can be released, so that the game area flows down to the general winning openings 35D and 35E. It is possible to diversify the paths of game balls to enter. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.

(6) The pachinko machine 10 includes the push button 25b for releasing the holding of the game ball by the holding devices 48 and 49 based on the operation of the player, so that the game ball is placed in the general prize opening at the timing intended by the player. 35D, 35E can be entered. Further, the switching means sets or clears a button valid flag (cancellation setting) that defines whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding devices 48 and 49 can be released by the push button 25b, and enables or disables the push button 25b. By changing to, it is switched whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding devices 48 and 49 can be released, so that the pachinko machine 10 has a timing at which the game ball can enter the general winning opening 35D and 35E. It can be set freely regardless of the person's intention. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.

(7) The switching means switches whether or not to cancel the holding of the game ball by the holding devices 48 and 49 based on the game ball output rate BA calculated in the output rate calculation process of step S314D. Therefore, the player pays attention to the game ball payout rate BA, so that the player's attention to the game can be further improved.
(8) When the switching means determines that the game ball output rate BA calculated in the game output rate calculation process in step S314D is smaller than 0.9 (the game ball output rate BA is less than 1). In some cases, that is, when the player's ball is decreasing, the player can switch the holding ball 48, 49 so that the holding of the game ball can be released, so the player can increase the ball that has been decreased. it can. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to further improve the player's attention to the game.

(9) When the holding devices 48, 49 release the holding of the game balls by the holding devices 48, 49, all the game balls among the held game balls are put into the general winning openings 35D, 35E. A large amount of game balls can be paid out to the payout device 71 at a time. Therefore, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, it is possible to further improve the player's attention to the game.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the present embodiment, and modifications, improvements, and the like within the scope that can achieve the object of the present invention are included in the present invention.
For example, in the present embodiment, the holding devices 48 and 49 are configured to be able to hold a plurality of game balls, and when the holding of the game balls by the holding devices 48 and 49 is released, All the game balls are configured to enter the general winning openings 35D and 35E. On the other hand, the holding means is configured to be able to hold a plurality of game balls, and when the holding of the game balls by the holding means is released, one of the held game balls is inserted. The ball means may be configured to enter the ball. According to this, when the holding means releases the holding of the game ball by the holding means, one of the holding game balls is put into the entering means, so that it is divided into multiple times. The game ball can be paid out to the payout device. Therefore, the gaming machine can further improve the degree of attention of the player to the game. In this case, the number of times that the holding of the game ball by the holding means may be randomly determined by lottery or the like.

  Further, in the present embodiment, can the MPU 62 release the game ball hold by the hold devices 48 and 49 with the push button 25b based on the game ball payout rate BA calculated in the ball payout rate calculation process? Switching to switch whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding devices 48 and 49 can be released by setting or clearing the button valid flag (release setting) that defines whether or not to change the push button 25b to valid or invalid It was functioning as a means. On the other hand, whether or not the switching means can release the holding of the game ball by the holding means by the release device based on a different standard from the game ball payout ratio calculated by the ball output rate calculating means. It may be switched whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding means can be released by changing the release setting that defines the above to valid or invalid.

  Specifically, for example, the switching means is provided in the game area formed on the game board and is connected to the operation ports (upper operation port 36 and lower operation port 37) for entering the game balls flowing down the game region. Based on the result of the internal lottery triggered by the entry, the release setting that defines whether or not the game ball can be held by the holding means can be changed to valid or invalid. For example, the MPU 62 sets the button valid flag (cancellation setting) and changes the push button 25b to be valid when the result of the success / failure lottery is “ordinary failure result” and the reach lottery is won. The push button 25b may be changed to be valid by setting a button valid flag (release setting) in accordance with the display duration set when the reach generation lottery is won. According to this, the switching means sets a release setting that specifies whether or not the release device can release the hold of the game ball by the hold means based on the result of the internal lottery triggered by entering the operation port. Since it is changed to valid or invalid, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the game ball can enter the ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can further improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

  In addition, for example, the gaming machine is provided in a gaming area formed on a gaming board of another gaming machine different from the gaming machine, and enters the operation port for entering a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area. The other means result acquisition means for acquiring the result of the internal lottery triggered by the, the switching means cancels the holding of the game ball by the holding means based on the result of the internal lottery acquired by the other machine result acquisition means You may change the cancellation | release setting which prescribes | regulates whether it can cancel | release with an apparatus to effective or invalid. For example, the pachinko machine 10 is a pachinko machine other than the pachinko machine 10 (a pachinko machine installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 10 on an island of a game hall constructed by arranging a plurality of pachinko machines in parallel. The result of the internal lottery triggered by the entry to the operating port of the device etc. is acquired via the network (other machine result acquisition means), and the button valid flag (release setting) is set based on the result of this internal lottery. The push button 25b may be set to valid or invalid by setting or clearing. For example, when another pachinko machine wins the big hit lottery, the button valid flag (release setting) is set and the push button 25b is made valid. It may be changed. According to this, the switching means sets a release setting that specifies whether or not the release device can release the hold of the game ball by the hold means based on the result of the internal lottery acquired by the other machine result acquisition means. Since it is changed to valid or invalid, it is possible to diversify the timing at which the game ball can enter the ball entry means. Therefore, the gaming machine can further improve the degree of attention of the player to the game.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the MPU 92 selects the effect D as the effect for the opening / closing execution mode in step S1211 (the game result is “the most advantageous result until 100 game times are exhausted after the opening / closing execution mode ends). ”Or“ Less probable result ”), the player is notified whether the distribution result was“ Most advantageous result ”or“ Less probable result ”. This is different from each of the embodiments described above, but this may be notified.

Specifically, for example, if the MPU 92 determines that the number of game balls held in the holding unit 491 in step S1222E has reached the upper limit (eight in this embodiment), the distribution result is The player may be notified of which of the “most advantageous result” and the “low probability result”.
Further, for example, if the MPU 92 determines that the hold release command has been received in step S1218D, the MPU 92 notifies the player of whether the distribution result is “the most advantageous result” or “the least probable result”. You may make it do.

[Modification of each embodiment]
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and modifications, improvements, and the like within the scope that can achieve the object of the present invention are included in the present invention.
(1) In each of the embodiments described above, the pachinko machine 10 executes one open / close of the big prize opening 38a for one round game. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may execute the opening / closing of the big prize winning opening 38a a plurality of times per round game.
(2) In each of the embodiments described above, the pachinko machine 10 sets the open / close doors 38b and 38d to the open state, and then a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses, or goes to the big prize opening 38a. The open / close doors 38b and 38d are set to the closed state again when the total number of winning game balls reaches the predetermined upper limit. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit number may vary according to the upper limit duration, and the conditions for setting the open / close doors 38b and 38d to the closed state again are arbitrary.

(3) In each of the above-described embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the open / close doors 38b and 38d to the open state and then the total number of game balls to be awarded to the big winning opening 38a is a predetermined upper limit number. Thus, the open / close doors 38b and 38d are set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set the upper limit number to an arbitrary number other than eight. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may set the upper limit number differently according to the distribution result. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may set the upper limit number different for each round in one opening / closing execution mode.

(4) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the open / close doors 38b and 38d to the open state, and then reaches the predetermined upper limit number of game balls to the big winning opening 38a. The open / close doors 38b and 38d are set to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 includes an end trigger for setting the open / close doors 38b and 38d in a closed state when a game ball enters, and when a predetermined time elapses, You may be comprised so that the entrance to this completion opportunity may be enabled.
(5) In each of the embodiments described above, the pachinko machine 10 sets the open / close doors 38b and 38d when a predetermined upper limit duration (upper limit duration) elapses after the open / close doors 38b and 38d are set in the open state. Was set to closed again. On the other hand, for example, the pachinko machine 10 sets the open / close doors 38b and 38d after the predetermined time has elapsed since the winning of the big winning opening 38a occurs after the open / close doors 38b and 38d are set in the open state. You may set 38b and 38d to a closed state again.

(6) In the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 sets the open / close doors 38b and 38d to the open state, and then sets the open / close doors 38b and 38d to the closed state again. On the other hand, for example, after the pachinko machine 10 sets the open / close doors 38b and 38d to the open state, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the next round game without setting the open / close doors 38b and 38d to the closed state again. Also good.
(7) In each of the above embodiments, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is set to be shorter than the game ball firing cycle. On the other hand, for example, the upper limit duration of the short-time mode is a time equal to or longer than the launching period of the game ball, and is not more than n times (n = 1, 2, 3) or less of the launching period of the game ball. It may be set to time.

(8) In the first to third embodiments, the fifth embodiment, and the sixth embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of opening / closing execution modes. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 has an opening / closing execution mode in which a round game is executed twice with a short duration upper limit duration and an opening / closing execution mode in which a round game is executed 15 times with a long duration upper limit duration. Had. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may have an opening / closing execution mode different from these with respect to the mode of the upper limit duration and the number of executions of the round game. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is configured by changing the degree of opening of the open / close door 38b such as half open or full open instead of the configuration of setting a plurality of types of open / close execution modes by changing the upper limit duration mode. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which a plurality of types of opening / closing execution modes are set. Furthermore, the upper limit duration may be set so that the exact upper limit duration is different although it appears to the player in the same mode.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the game result and the effect for the opening / closing execution mode are set in advance so as to correspond one-to-one. On the other hand, for example, the effect for the opening / closing execution mode may be set by randomly selecting from a plurality of types of effects without corresponding to the game result, or selected by lottery from a plurality of types of effects. The selection rate may be set different depending on the game result.

(10) In the first to third embodiments, the fifth embodiment, and the sixth embodiment, the MPU 92 has a game result of “special out-of-game result”, “implicit low-round high-accuracy result”, And “an explicit small round high-accuracy result”, information relating to a special symbol combination is determined as a stop result to be finally stopped on the active line L, and this special symbol combination is determined. Were the same regardless of the type of game result. On the other hand, the MPU 92 may determine information related to the stop result at random and make it difficult for the player to know which game result it is.

(11) In the first to third embodiments, the fifth embodiment, and the sixth embodiment, the MPU 62 uses the jackpot random number counter C1 in the lottery for lottery occurrence, and when the jackpot occurs, the jackpot The jackpot type counter C2 was used for lottery of types. On the other hand, the MPU 62 may use the jackpot random number counter C1 for the lottery type lottery when the jackpot occurs. In this case, the big hit type counter C2 may not be provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64.

(12) In the first to third embodiments, the fifth embodiment, and the sixth embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 has two types of “special outage results” and “normal outage results”. The MPU 62 has a result of losing, and the MPU 62 draws a jackpot occurrence lottery by comparing the success / failure table storing the random number value to win the jackpot occurrence with the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 64b. Was running. In other words, the MPU 62 uses the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 to execute the lottery related to the “special loss result”. On the other hand, the MPU 62 uses a new counter different from the jackpot random number counter C1 provided in the various counter areas 64a of the RAM 64 in order to execute the lottery related to the “special loss result”. A lottery related to “result” may be executed.

(13) In the first embodiment to the third embodiment, the fifth embodiment, and the sixth embodiment, in a gaming state in which a winning table for low probability mode is referred to when a lottery is generated. The number of random numbers that will be the “special loss result” is two, and the random number value that will be the “special loss result” in the gaming state where the success / failure table for the high probability mode will be referred to when the jackpot occurs Was one. In other words, the probability of the “special loss result” is set to be higher in the low probability mode than in the high probability mode. On the other hand, the probability of the “special outlier result” may be set to be lower in the low probability mode than in the high probability mode, and is set to be the same in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. May be. Further, the probability of the “special loss result” may be set to be 0 in at least one of the low probability mode and the high probability mode.

(14) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 creates a game state advantageous to the player and an unfavorable game state by setting the success / failure lottery mode and the support mode. By setting the state, a game state that is advantageous to the player and a game state that is disadvantageous may be created. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and an unfavorable gaming state by making the number of game times to continue the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. In addition, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state that is advantageous to the player and an unfavorable gaming state depending on whether or not to shift to the high-frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may create a gaming state advantageous to the player and an unfavorable gaming state by differentiating the number of game times in which the high probability mode is continued after the opening / closing execution mode ends. .

(15) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 stores the holding information related to the upper operating ports 36 and 36B in the first result display unit holding area Ra, and stores the holding information related to the lower operating ports 37 as the second result. By storing the information in the display area reservation area Rb, the storage information related to the upper operation ports 36 and 36B and the storage information related to the lower operation port 37 are stored separately. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 10 may store together the hold information related to the upper working ports 36 and 36 </ b> B and the hold information related to the lower working ports 37.
(16) In each of the embodiments described above, the MPU 62 preferentially sets the hold information related to the lower operation port 37 for digestion of the game times regardless of whether there is hold information related to the upper operation ports 36 and 36B. It was. On the other hand, the MPU 62 may set the hold information related to the upper operation ports 36 and 36B and the hold information related to the lower operation ports 37 for digestion of game times in the order of winning of the respective hold information.

(17) In each of the above embodiments, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the sound emission control device 90, and the sound emission control device 90 transmits a command as a result of analyzing the command to the display control device 100. Thus, control of the display control apparatus 100 is executed. On the other hand, the main control device 60 transmits a command to the display control device 100, and the display control device 100 transmits a command obtained as a result of analyzing the command to the sound light emission control device 90. Control of the device 90 may be performed. The commands transmitted from the main control device 60 to the sound emission control device 90 and the commands transmitted from the sound emission control device 90 to the display control device 100 are not limited to the commands described in the above embodiments, but are arbitrary. .
(18) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 includes the main control device 60, the sound emission control device 90, and the display control device 100 as separate control devices. In contrast, for example, the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 may be provided as the same control device, and at least one of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 is mainly used. The same control device as the control device 60 may be provided.

(19) In each of the above embodiments, the symbol display device 51 periodically scrolls the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on winning in the upper working port 36, 36B or the lower working port 37. In this way, by starting the variable display of symbols, an effect for game times is executed on the display screen G. On the other hand, the effects for game times are not limited to the effects described in the above embodiments, but are arbitrary. For example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute effects for game times by operating movable decorative members provided on the game boards 31A to 31E and 31Z. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute an effect for game times by causing the light emitting means provided in the game boards 31A to 31E and 31Z to emit light. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may execute an effect for game play by operating the symbol display device 51 in combination with these decorative members and light emitting means.

(20) In each of the embodiments described above, the pachinko machine 10 executes an internal lottery (winning lottery and distribution lottery) on the basis of winning in the upper working port 36, 36B or the lower working port 37, and then the main display The unit 45 and the symbol display device 51 execute the variable display and display the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning to the upper operating port 36, 36B or the lower operating port 37 as a result of stopping the variable display. Was. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 and the symbol display device 51 start the variable display before executing the internal lottery, and the internal lottery performed after starting the variable display as a result of stopping the variable display. The result may be displayed. In this case, after starting the variable display and before stopping the variable display, the internal lottery may be executed and the setting of the stop result or the like may be executed.

(21) In each of the embodiments described above, the pachinko machine 10 includes the main display unit 45, and the main display unit 45 displays the variation display of the pattern and displays the result of the internal lottery as a stop result of the variation display. Was. On the other hand, for example, the main display unit 45 may display the same stop result as the change display stop result regardless of the result of the internal lottery. The result of the lottery may not be identified. Further, for example, the pachinko machine 10 may not include the main display unit 45.

(22) In each of the above embodiments, the symbol display device 51 periodically scrolls the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 in a predetermined direction based on winning in the upper working port 36, 36B or the lower working port 37. In this way, by starting the variable display of symbols, an effect for game times is executed on the display screen G. On the other hand, the symbol display device 51 may execute an effect for game times on the display screen G by displaying a symbol (design) that clearly shows the result of the internal lottery.

  For example, the symbol display device 51 assigns a predetermined area to at least one of the area narrower than the area for displaying the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 and the peripheral area of the region for displaying the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. When setting and stopping the variable display of the symbols of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, a symbol that clearly indicates the result of the internal lottery may be displayed in this predetermined area. The symbols displayed in the predetermined area may be displayed in a variable manner or may not be displayed during the variable display of the symbols in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3.

  Here, as the symbols displayed in the predetermined area, characters, colors or patterns that are difficult for the player to identify may be adopted, or a combination thereof may be adopted. Moreover, even if it is not a character, a color, or a pattern that is difficult for a player to identify, it is possible to make it difficult for a player to identify by adopting a similar pattern or a combination thereof. According to this, the manager of the game hall, for example, is the same as the case where the lottery in which the jackpot is generated is won by observing the symbol display device 51 without observing the main display unit 45 at the end of the game round. It is possible to easily check whether or not an illegal act is attempted to cause the pachinko machine 10 to perform the above behavior.

(23) In each of the embodiments described above, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to operate alone, but may be configured to transmit and receive information by interlocking with an external device such as a mobile phone. . For example, a gaming machine is configured so that an optical code can be output by a player operating a button or the like provided on the gaming machine, and information on the optical code is provided on a mobile phone or the like. The gaming machine may be configured such that information on the gaming machine can be transmitted to the web server by imaging and reading at and accessing the website. In addition, the gaming machine is configured to receive the information of the web server by inputting the password issued by the player accessing the website into the gaming machine by operating a button or the like provided on the gaming machine. May be. According to such a configuration, for example, a game machine manufacturer who is an administrator of the web server enters the disadvantageous side entry means for the number of game balls entered in the advantage side entry means during a predetermined period. By configuring the gaming machine to output the information relating to the ratio of the number of game balls included in the optical code, the setting of the distribution means (the ratio of the game balls to be distributed to the advantageous side entry means and It is possible to acquire information on the setting of the ratio of distributing game balls to the disadvantageous side entry means.

(24) In each of the above embodiments, the pachinko machine 10 has been described as an example of the gaming machine of the present invention. On the other hand, the gaming machine of the present invention may be another type of pachinko machine different from the pachinko machine 10, for example, the gaming machine of the present invention, when a game ball enters a specific area, It may be a pachinko machine that opens the electric accessory a predetermined number of times, or a pachinko machine that generates a jackpot right when a game ball enters a specific area. Further, the gaming machine of the present invention may be other types of gaming machines such as an arrangement ball machine and a sparrow ball.

[Invention group extracted from each embodiment]
Hereinafter, features of the invention group extracted from each of the embodiments will be described. Of the features of the present invention group, the configuration corresponding to each of the above embodiments is shown in parentheses, but the features of the present invention group are not limited to the above embodiments, and the features of the present invention group Modifications, improvements, etc. within a range where the object can be achieved, and combinations of features are included in the features of the present invention group.

<Feature A group>
Feature A1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the game board, and a plurality of entrance means (large winning mouths) provided in the game area for entering the game ball A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising: 38a and a second outlet 39b) and a distribution means (nail 44a) for distributing the game ball to any of the plurality of ball entry means.
The plurality of ball entry means include
Advantageous side entry means (large winning opening 38a) for giving an advantageous result to the player when entering the game ball;
A disadvantageous side entry means (second out port 39b) for giving a player a disadvantageous result than the advantageous result given by the advantageous side entry means to the player when entering the game ball;
The gaming machine is
When the game balls are distributed to the disadvantageous side entry means by the distribution means, special effect execution means (sound light emission control device 90 and display control device 100) for executing a special effect is provided,
The allocating means is configured to be able to set a ratio of distributing the game balls to the advantageous side incoming means and entering a ratio and a ratio of distributing the game balls to the disadvantageous incoming means and entering the balls. A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the feature A1 of the present invention group, the special effect executing means executes the special effect when the game balls are distributed to the disadvantageous side entry means by the distributing means. According to this, when the distribution means is set so as to distribute a lot of game balls to the disadvantageous side entry means, the distribution means is set so as to distribute a lot of game balls to the advantage side entry means Compared with, the player can enjoy many effects. In other words, the player can play a game comfortably even when the sorting means is set so as to distribute a large number of game balls to the disadvantageous side entry means. Therefore, according to the feature A1 of the present invention group, the player can comfortably play the game without reducing the degree of freedom of setting the distribution means, and the player's attention to the game is improved. Can do.

Feature A2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A1 of the present invention group,
The distribution means increases the ratio of distributing the game balls to the advantageous side entrance means and entering the balls, and decreases the ratio of distributing the game balls to the disadvantage side entrance means and entering the first. And the second state in which the ratio of the game balls to be distributed to the advantageous side entrance means is reduced and the ratio of the game balls to be input to the disadvantage side entrance means is increased. A gaming machine that is configured to be switchable and settable.

  According to the feature A2 of the present invention group, the allocating means switches between the first state and the second state so as to distribute and enter the game balls into the advantageous side entry means, The ratio at which the game balls are distributed to the disadvantageous side entry means can be set. Therefore, according to the feature A2 of the present invention group, the configuration of the distributing means can be simplified.

Feature A3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A1 or feature A2 of the present invention group,
The special performance execution means
A game ball holding mechanism (game ball holding mechanism 40) for holding the game balls distributed to the disadvantageous side entry means by the distribution means;
The game ball holding mechanism is
A holding unit (holding unit 401) for holding the game balls distributed to the disadvantageous side entry unit by the distribution unit and holding the game balls;
A gaming machine comprising: an information adding unit (information providing unit 402) that provides information to a player using the game ball held by the holding unit.

  According to the feature A3 of the present invention group, the special effect executing means includes a holding unit that holds a game ball that has entered a ball, and an information grant that gives information to a player using the game ball held by the holding unit. Therefore, the player can first pay attention to whether or not the game ball is held in the holding portion, and then pay attention to the information given by the information giving portion step by step. Therefore, according to the feature A3 of the present invention group, the player's attention to the game can be improved.

Feature A4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A3 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the holding portion is provided between the advantageous side entry means and the disadvantageous side entry means.

  According to the feature A4 of the present invention group, since the holding portion is provided between the advantageous side entry means and the disadvantageous side entry means, the player can enter the game ball into the disadvantageous side entry means. It becomes easier to pay attention to whether or not a game ball has entered the advantageous side entrance means and the holding unit, rather than whether or not it has entered. Therefore, according to the feature A4 of the present invention group, the player can comfortably play the game without reducing the degree of freedom of setting the distribution means, and the player's attention to the game is improved. Can do.

Feature A5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A3 or feature A4 of the present invention group,
The holding part is
A passage (large) having an entrance for entering the game balls distributed to the disadvantageous side entry means by the distribution means, and an exit for entering the game balls entered from the entrance into the information providing unit A passage provided between the winning port 38a and the second out port 39b),
A first plate (upper plate 401a) for setting the inlet of the holding portion to either an open state or a closed state;
A second plate (lower plate 401b) for setting the outlet of the holding portion to either an open state or a closed state;
A gaming machine comprising a plate driving unit (plate driving unit 401c) for driving the first plate and the second plate.

  According to the feature A5 of the present invention group, when both the first plate and the second plate are set in the closed state, a holding space capable of holding the game ball can be formed in the passage of the holding portion. And a holding | maintenance part can make a game ball enter into holding | maintenance space by setting a 1st plate to an open state and setting a 2nd plate to a closed state. Thereafter, when the second plate is set to the open state, the holding unit can cause the game ball held in the holding space to enter the information providing unit. Therefore, according to the feature A5 of the present invention group, the configuration of the holding portion of the gaming machine described in the feature A3 or the feature A4 of the present invention group can be simplified.

Feature A6.
In the gaming machine described in any of features A3 to A5 of the present invention group,
The information giving unit
An advantageous side entrance (upper entrance 402b) for notifying that the game state is advantageous for the player by detecting the entrance of the game ball to the player,
A disadvantageous entrance (lower entrance 402c) for notifying the player that the game is in an unfavorable gaming state by detecting the entry of the game ball into the player;
A guide member (guide member 402d) for guiding the game ball held by the holding portion to the advantageous side entrance or the disadvantage side entrance;
A gaming machine comprising a guide member driving unit (guide member driving unit 402e) for driving the guide member.

  According to the feature A6 of the present invention group, the information providing unit guides the game ball held by the holding unit by driving the guide member by the guide member driving unit to the advantageous side entrance or the disadvantage side entrance. By doing so, it is possible to notify whether the game state is advantageous or unfavorable for the player. Therefore, according to the feature A6 of the present invention group, since the player pays attention to the whereabouts of the game ball, the player's attention to the game can be improved.

Feature A7.
In the gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A6 of the present invention group,
Useful information or a privilege is given to a player when a special effect is executed by the special effect executing means.

  According to the feature A7 of the present invention group, when a special effect is executed by the special effect execution means, the game machine gives useful information or a privilege to the player. Can be improved.

Feature A8.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A7 of the present invention group,
Provided in a game area formed in the game board, and provided with operation ports (upper operation port 36 and lower operation port 37) for entering game balls flowing down the game region, and entering the operation port as an opportunity The internal lottery
A first internal lottery result (“special outage result” or “low probability result”) that becomes a gaming state disadvantageous to the player (the lottery mode does not shift, or the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode);
The gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the unfavorable gaming state transitioned by the first internal lottery result (the winning lottery mode transitions to the high probability mode), and as if the unfavorable gaming state. 2nd internal lottery result (“Inexplicitly small round high-accuracy result” for “special out-of-range results” or “Best result” for “low-accuracy results”) ,
When executing a special effect by the special effect execution means, the player is provided with useful information by releasing the impersonation and notifying the player that the result was the second internal lottery result. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature A8 of the present invention group, the gaming machine shifts to a first internal lottery result that shifts to a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, and to a gaming state that is more advantageous than a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, Since the player has the second internal lottery result disguised as if it is in an unfavorable gaming state, the player can confirm the behavior of the gaming machine and thereby determine the first internal lottery result and the second internal lottery result. It is not possible to grasp which of the internal lottery results.

  However, when the game machine executes the special effect by the special effect execution means, the impersonation is canceled and the player is notified that the result was the second internal lottery result. By executing a special effect by the execution means, it is possible to grasp which is the first internal lottery result or the second internal lottery result. Therefore, according to the feature A8 of the present invention group, the player pays attention to whether or not the game ball is distributed to the disadvantageous side entry means by the distribution means, so the player pays attention to the game. The degree can be improved.

Feature A9.
In the gaming machine described in the feature A7 of the present invention group,
Provided in a game area formed in the game board, and provided with operation ports (upper operation port 36 and lower operation port 37) for entering game balls flowing down the game region, and entering the operation port as an opportunity The internal lottery
The operating port is
An advantageous side operation port (lower operation port 37) that is executed when an advantageous internal lottery is entered upon entering the ball,
A disadvantageous working port (upper working port 36) in which an internal lottery, which is disadvantageous compared to an advantageous internal lottery executed when triggered by entering into the advantageous side working port, is executed when triggered by entering into the self. ,
The gaming machine is
When a special effect is executed by the special effect executing means, a privilege is given to the player by setting to execute the advantageous internal lottery with the entrance to the disadvantageous side operation opening as a trigger. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature A9 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is set so as to execute an advantageous internal lottery triggered by entering the disadvantaged side operation port when executing a special effect by the special effect executing means. Therefore, the player can execute an internal lottery that is advantageous to the gaming machine even if the player enters the disadvantage side operation port by executing the special effect by the special effect executing means. Therefore, according to the feature A9 of the present invention group, the player pays a lot of attention to whether or not the game ball is distributed to the disadvantage-side entrance means by the distribution means. The degree of attention can be further improved.

  According to the feature group A of the present invention, the player's attention to the game can be improved, and the following problems can be solved.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine including a display device that variably displays a plurality of pictures is known. This gaming machine includes an operation port provided in the game area, and when a game ball enters the operation port, the game machine executes an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery and starts to display a variation of the pattern. For example, when the game machine wins the big hit lottery, the game machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific pictures on the display device and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

  However, since game balls that have not entered the operation port will be collected at the out port provided in the game area, the opportunity to execute an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery, or the display of variation of the pattern is started It is not an opportunity to do. Therefore, there is a problem that a player's attention to the game decreases.

<Feature B group>
Feature B1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the game board, and a plurality of entrance means (large winning mouths) provided in the game area for entering the game ball A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising: 38a and a second outlet 39b) and a distribution means (nail 44a) for distributing the game ball to any of the plurality of ball entry means.
The plurality of ball entry means include
Advantageous side entry means (large winning opening 38a) for giving an advantageous result to the player when entering the game ball;
A disadvantageous side entry means (second out port 39b) for giving a player a disadvantageous result than the advantageous result given by the advantageous side entry means to the player when entering the game ball;
The gaming machine is
Game ball counting means (non-winning counter NPC) for counting the game balls that have entered the disadvantageous side entry means,
Special effect execution means for executing a special effect when the number of the game balls that have entered the disadvantageous side entry means counted in the predetermined period by the game ball counting means is greater than a predetermined number. A sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100),
The allocating means is configured to be able to set a ratio of distributing the game balls to the advantageous side incoming means and entering a ratio and a ratio of distributing the game balls to the disadvantageous incoming means and entering the balls. A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the feature B1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine includes game ball counting means for counting game balls that have entered the disadvantageous side entry means. The special effect execution means executes the special effect when the number of game balls that have entered the disadvantageous side entry means counted in the predetermined period by the game ball counting means is larger than the predetermined number. . According to this, when the distribution means is set so as to distribute a lot of game balls to the disadvantageous side entry means, the distribution means is set so as to distribute a lot of game balls to the advantage side entry means Compared with, the player can enjoy many effects. In other words, the player can play a game comfortably even when the sorting means is set so as to distribute a large number of game balls to the disadvantageous side entry means. Therefore, according to the feature B1 of the invention group, the player can comfortably play the game without reducing the degree of freedom of setting the distribution means, and the player's attention to the game is improved. Can do.

Feature B2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B1 of the present invention group,
The distribution means increases the ratio of distributing the game balls to the advantageous side entrance means and entering the balls, and decreases the ratio of distributing the game balls to the disadvantage side entrance means and entering the first. And the second state in which the ratio of the game balls to be distributed to the advantageous side entrance means is reduced and the ratio of the game balls to be input to the disadvantage side entrance means is increased. A gaming machine that is configured to be switchable and settable.

  According to the feature B2 of the present invention group, the allocating means switches between the first state and the second state so as to distribute the game balls to the advantageous side entering means and enter the ratio. The ratio at which the game balls are distributed to the disadvantageous side entry means can be set. Therefore, according to the feature B2 of the present invention group, the configuration of the distributing means can be simplified.

Feature B3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B1 or feature B2 of the present invention group,
The game ball counting means (winning counter PC and non-winning counter NPC) counts game balls that have entered the disadvantageous side entry means, and counts game balls that have entered the advantageous side entry means,
The special effect execution means includes the number of game balls that have entered the disadvantage side entry means relative to the number of game balls that have entered the advantage side entry means counted in a predetermined period by the game ball counting means. A game machine characterized in that a special performance is executed according to the ratio.

According to the feature B3 of the present invention group, the special effect execution means enters the disadvantageous side entry means for the number of game balls entered into the advantage side entry means counted in the predetermined period by the game ball counting means. A special performance is executed according to the ratio of the number of game balls that have been balled. Therefore, the player pays attention to what ratio the game ball enters the advantage side entry means and the disadvantage side entry means, so that the player's attention to the game is improved. Can do.
In the feature B3 of the present invention group, the special effect execution means is a disadvantageous side entry means for the number of game balls entered in the advantage side entry means counted in a predetermined period by the game ball counting means. A special effect may be executed when the ratio of the number of game balls entered is higher than a predetermined ratio, and a special effect may be executed when the ratio is lower than the predetermined ratio. Special effects may be executed in the same case.

Feature B4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B3 of the present invention group,
The special effect execution means includes the number of game balls that have entered the disadvantage side entry means relative to the number of game balls that have entered the advantage side entry means counted in a predetermined period by the game ball counting means. A gaming machine characterized in that a special performance is executed when the ratio of the game is higher than a predetermined ratio.

  According to the feature B4 of the present invention group, the special effect execution means enters the disadvantageous side entry means for the number of game balls entered into the advantage side entry means counted in the predetermined period by the game ball counting means. Special effects are executed when the ratio of the number of game balls that have been struck is higher than a predetermined ratio, so it is advantageous if the distribution means is set to distribute many game balls to the disadvantageous side entry means. Compared with the case where the sorting means is set so as to distribute many game balls to the side entry means, the player can enjoy many effects. In other words, the player can play a game comfortably even when the sorting means is set so as to distribute a large number of game balls to the disadvantageous side entry means. Therefore, according to the feature B4 of the present invention group, the player can comfortably play the game without reducing the degree of freedom of setting the distribution means, and the player's attention to the game is improved. Can do.

Feature B5.
In the gaming machine described in any of features B1 to B4 of the present invention group,
Useful information or a privilege is given to a player when a special effect is executed by the special effect executing means.

  According to the feature B5 of the present invention group, when the game machine executes a special effect by the special effect execution means, the player gives useful information or a privilege to the player. Can be improved.

Feature B6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B5 of the present invention group,
Provided in a game area formed in the game board, and provided with operation ports (upper operation port 36 and lower operation port 37) for entering game balls flowing down the game region, and entering the operation port as an opportunity The internal lottery
A first internal lottery result (“special outage result” or “low probability result”) that becomes a gaming state disadvantageous to the player (the lottery mode does not shift, or the lottery mode shifts to the low probability mode);
The gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the unfavorable gaming state transitioned by the first internal lottery result (the winning lottery mode transitions to the high probability mode), and as if the unfavorable gaming state. 2nd internal lottery result (“Inexplicitly small round high-accuracy result” for “special out-of-range results” or “Best result” for “low-accuracy results”) ,
When executing a special effect by the special effect execution means, the player is provided with useful information by releasing the impersonation and notifying the player that the result was the second internal lottery result. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature B6 of the present invention group, the gaming machine shifts to a gaming state that is more advantageous than a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, a first internal lottery result that shifts to a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player, Since the player has the second internal lottery result disguised as if it is in an unfavorable gaming state, the player can confirm the behavior of the gaming machine and thereby determine the first internal lottery result and the second internal lottery result. It is not possible to grasp which of the internal lottery results.

  However, when the game machine executes the special effect by the special effect execution means, the impersonation is canceled and the player is notified that the result was the second internal lottery result. By executing a special effect by the execution means, it is possible to grasp which is the first internal lottery result or the second internal lottery result. Therefore, according to the feature B6 of the present invention group, the player pays attention to whether or not the game ball is distributed to the disadvantageous side entry means by the distribution means, so the player pays attention to the game. The degree can be improved.

Feature B7.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B5 of the present invention group,
Provided in a game area formed in the game board, and provided with operation ports (upper operation port 36 and lower operation port 37) for entering game balls flowing down the game region, and entering the operation port as an opportunity The internal lottery
The operating port is
An advantageous side operation port (lower operation port 37) that is executed when an advantageous internal lottery is entered upon entering the ball,
A disadvantageous working port (upper working port 36) in which an internal lottery, which is disadvantageous compared to an advantageous internal lottery executed when triggered by entering into the advantageous side working port, is executed when triggered by entering into the self. ,
The gaming machine is
When a special effect is executed by the special effect executing means, a privilege is given to the player by setting to execute the advantageous internal lottery with the entrance to the disadvantageous side operation opening as a trigger. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature B7 of the present invention group, the game machine is set so as to execute an advantageous internal lottery triggered by entering the disadvantageous side operation opening when executing a special effect by the special effect executing means. Therefore, the player can execute an internal lottery that is advantageous to the gaming machine even if the player enters the disadvantage side operation port by executing the special effect by the special effect executing means. Therefore, according to the feature B7 of the present invention group, the player pays a lot of attention to whether or not the game ball is distributed to the disadvantage-side entrance means by the distribution means. The degree of attention can be further improved.

Feature B8.
In the gaming machine described in any of features B1 to B4 of the present invention group,
Provided in a game area formed in the game board, and provided with operation ports (upper operation port 36B and lower operation port 37) for entering game balls flowing down the game region,
The operating port is
An upper operating port (upper operating port 36B) that opens upward to allow the game ball to enter;
A lower working port (lower working port 37) that is provided below the upper working port and opens upward so as to allow the game ball to enter,
The upper working port is
A bottom opening / closing door (bottom opening / closing door 36 </ b> B <b> 3) that is provided so as to be openable and closable and forms a bottom portion by closing;
A bottom drive unit (bottom drive unit 36B4) for setting the bottom open / close door to either a closed state or an open state by driving the bottom open / close door;
The game ball that has entered the opening of the upper working port enters the upper working port when the bottom opening door is set in the closed state by the bottom driving unit, and the bottom driving unit When the bottom door is set to the open state, it enters the lower working port,
The gaming machine is
When the special effect execution means executes a special effect, the bottom surface opening / closing door is set to an open state by the bottom surface driving unit.

  According to the feature B8 of the present invention group, when the game machine executes a special effect by the special effect execution means, the bottom surface opening / closing door is set to the open state by the bottom surface driving unit, so that the opening of the upper working port is opened. The game ball that entered the ball enters the lower working port. Therefore, according to the feature B8 of the present invention group, it is possible to diversify the path of the ball entering the lower working port, and to improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature B9.
In the gaming machine described in the feature B8 of the present invention group,
Execute an internal lottery triggered by a game ball entering the upper operating port and the lower operating port,
A game machine characterized in that an internal lottery triggered by a ball entering the lower working port is more advantageous to a player than an internal lottery triggered by a ball entering the upper working port.

  According to the feature B9 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is configured so that an internal lottery advantageous to a player can enter a game ball that has entered the opening of the upper working port by setting the bottom opening / closing door to an open state by the bottom driving unit. Can be made to enter the lower working port which becomes an opportunity to execute. Therefore, the gaming machine can give a privilege to the player when the special effect is executed by the special effect executing means, and can further improve the player's attention to the game.

  According to such a feature group B of the present invention, the player's attention to the game can be improved, so the following problems can be solved.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine including a display device that variably displays a plurality of pictures is known. This gaming machine includes an operation port provided in the game area, and when a game ball enters the operation port, the game machine executes an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery and starts to display a variation of the pattern. For example, when the game machine wins the big hit lottery, the game machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific pictures on the display device and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

  However, since game balls that have not entered the operation port will be collected at the out port provided in the game area, the opportunity to execute an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery, or the display of variation of the pattern is started It is not an opportunity to do. Therefore, there is a problem that a player's attention to the game decreases.

<Feature C group>
Feature C1.
A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) provided in a gaming area formed on a gaming board and provided with an operating port (upper operating port 36B and lower operating port 37) for entering a game ball flowing down the gaming area. ,
The operating port is
An upper operating port (upper operating port 36B) that opens upward to allow the game ball to enter;
A lower working port (lower working port 37) that is provided below the upper working port and opens upward so as to allow the game ball to enter,
The upper working port is
A bottom opening / closing door (bottom opening / closing door 36 </ b> B <b> 3) that is provided so as to be openable and closable and forms a bottom portion by closing;
A bottom drive unit (bottom drive unit 36B4) for setting the bottom open / close door to either a closed state or an open state by driving the bottom open / close door;
The game ball that has entered the opening of the upper working port enters the upper working port when the bottom opening door is set in the closed state by the bottom driving unit, and the bottom driving unit A gaming machine characterized in that when the bottom opening / closing door is set in an open state, the ball enters the lower working port.

  According to the feature C1 of the present invention group, a game ball that has entered the opening of the upper working port enters the lower working port when the bottom opening / closing door is set to the open state by the bottom driving unit. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the path of the ball entering the lower working port.

Feature C2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C1 of the present invention group,
Execute an internal lottery triggered by a game ball entering the upper operating port and the lower operating port,
A game machine characterized in that an internal lottery triggered by a ball entering the lower working port is more advantageous to a player than an internal lottery triggered by a ball entering the upper working port.

  According to the feature C2 of the present invention group, the gaming machine sets the bottom opening / closing door in the open state by the bottom surface driving unit, so that the bottom operating port serving as a trigger for executing an internal lottery advantageous to the player is A game ball that has entered the opening of the operating port can be entered. Therefore, the gaming machine can give a privilege to the player.

Feature C3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C1 or feature C2 of the present invention group,
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the game board, and a plurality of entrance means (large winning mouths) provided in the game area for entering the game ball 38a and second out port 39b), and distribution means (nails 44a) for distributing the game balls to any of the plurality of entrance means and entering the balls,
The plurality of ball entry means include
Advantageous side entry means (large winning opening 38a) for giving an advantageous result to the player when entering the game ball;
A disadvantageous side entry means (second out port 39b) for giving a player a disadvantageous result than the advantageous result given by the advantageous side entry means to the player when entering the game ball;
The gaming machine is
When the game balls are distributed to the disadvantageous side entry means by the distribution means, special effect execution means (sound light emission control device 90 and display control device 100) for executing a special effect is provided,
When executing a special effect in the special effect execution means, set the bottom opening door in the open state in the bottom drive unit,
The allocating means is configured to be able to set a ratio of distributing the game balls to the advantageous side incoming means and entering a ratio and a ratio of distributing the game balls to the disadvantageous incoming means and entering the balls. A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the feature C3 of the present invention group, the special effect executing means executes the special effect when the game balls are distributed to the disadvantageous side entry means by the distributing means. According to this, when the distribution means is set so as to distribute a lot of game balls to the disadvantageous side entry means, the distribution means is set so as to distribute a lot of game balls to the advantage side entry means Compared with, the player can enjoy many effects. In other words, the player can play a game comfortably even when the sorting means is set so as to distribute a large number of game balls to the disadvantageous side entry means. Therefore, according to the feature C3 of the present invention group, the player can comfortably play the game without reducing the degree of freedom of setting the distribution means, and the player's attention to the game is improved. Can do.

  Further, according to the feature C3 of the present invention group, when the game machine executes a special effect by the special effect execution means, the bottom opening / closing door is set to the open state by the bottom surface drive unit, so The game ball that has entered the opening will enter the lower working port. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the path of entering the ball to the lower working port, and it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.

  In particular, the internal lottery is executed with the entrance to the upper working port and the lower working port, and the internal lottery with the entrance to the lower working port is the internal When the gaming machine is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery, the gaming machine enters the opening of the upper working port by setting the bottom opening / closing door to the open state at the bottom driving unit. The game ball can be entered into the lower operation port that triggers the execution of an internal lottery advantageous to the player. Therefore, the gaming machine can give a privilege to the player by setting the bottom surface opening / closing door to the open state by the bottom surface drive unit when the special performance is executed by the special effect execution means.

Feature C4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C1 or feature C2 of the present invention group,
The bottom opening / closing lottery for lottering whether or not the bottom opening / closing door is set to the open state is executed, and the bottom opening / closing door is opened or closed by the bottom driving unit based on the result of the bottom opening / closing lottery. A gaming machine characterized by being set to.

  According to the feature C4 of the present invention group, the gaming machine performs a bottom opening / closing lottery for lottering whether or not the bottom opening / closing door is set to an open state, and based on a result of the bottom opening / closing lottery, Since the bottom opening / closing door is set to the open state, the game ball that has entered the opening of the upper working port enters the lower working port. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the path of entering the ball to the lower working port, and to improve the player's attention to the game.

  In particular, the internal lottery is executed with the entrance to the upper working port and the lower working port, and the internal lottery with the entrance to the lower working port is the internal When the gaming machine is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery, the gaming machine enters the opening of the upper working port by setting the bottom opening / closing door to the open state at the bottom driving unit. The game ball can be entered into the lower operation port that triggers the execution of an internal lottery advantageous to the player. Therefore, the gaming machine sets the bottom opening / closing door in the open state by the bottom surface driving unit, thereby allowing the game ball that has entered the opening of the upper operation opening to enter the lower operation opening and gives a privilege to the player. be able to.

Feature C5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature C1 or feature C2 of the present invention group,
Performing an internal lottery triggered by a game ball entering the upper operating port and the lower operating port, and holding at least one game ball entering the upper operating port,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the bottom opening / closing door is set to an open state by the bottom surface driving unit when the number of reserved parts related to the upper operating port reaches an upper limit.

  According to the feature C5 of the present invention group, since the gaming machine sets the bottom opening / closing door to the open state at the bottom driving unit when the number of reserved parts related to the upper working opening reaches the upper limit, The game ball that has entered the opening enters the lower working port. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the route of entering the ball to the lower working port, to improve the player's attention to the game, and to reach the upper limit of the number of reserved for the upper working port. However, it is possible to cause the gaming machine to execute an internal lottery when the gaming ball enters the lower working port.

  In particular, the internal lottery is executed with the entrance to the upper working port and the lower working port, and the internal lottery with the entrance to the lower working port is the internal When the gaming machine is configured to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery, the gaming machine enters the opening of the upper working port by setting the bottom opening / closing door to the open state at the bottom driving unit. The game ball can be entered into the lower operation port that triggers the execution of an internal lottery advantageous to the player. Therefore, the gaming machine sets the bottom opening / closing door in the open state by the bottom surface driving unit, thereby allowing the game ball that has entered the opening of the upper operation opening to enter the lower operation opening and gives a privilege to the player. be able to.

  According to the feature group C of the present invention, the player's attention to the game can be improved, so that the following problems can be solved.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine including a display device that variably displays a plurality of pictures is known. This gaming machine includes an operation port provided in the game area, and when a game ball enters the operation port, the game machine executes an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery and starts to display a variation of the pattern. For example, when the game machine wins the big hit lottery, the game machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific pictures on the display device and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

  However, since the game balls are all collected after entering the operation port, the player loses interest in the future of the game balls. Therefore, there is a problem that a player's attention to the game decreases.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the game board, and a plurality of entrance means (large winning mouths) provided in the game area for entering the game ball A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising: 38a and a second outlet 39b) and a distribution means (nail 44a) for distributing the game ball to any of the plurality of ball entry means.
The plurality of ball entry means include
Advantageous side entry means (large winning opening 38a) for giving an advantageous result to the player when entering the game ball;
A disadvantageous side entry means (second out port 39b) for giving a player a disadvantageous result than the advantageous result given by the advantageous side entry means to the player when entering the game ball;
The gaming machine is
Special distribution execution means (game ball distribution mechanism 47) for executing special distribution when the game balls are distributed to the disadvantageous side entry means by the distribution means;
Special effect execution means (sound emission control device 90 and display control device 100) for executing a special effect based on the distribution result executed by the special distribution execution means,
The allocating means is configured to be able to set a ratio of distributing the game balls to the advantageous side incoming means and entering a ratio and a ratio of distributing the game balls to the disadvantageous incoming means and entering the balls. A gaming machine characterized by

  According to the feature D1 of the present invention group, the special distribution execution means executes special distribution when the game balls are distributed to the disadvantageous side entry means by the distribution means. The special effect executing means executes the special effect based on the distribution result executed by the special distribution executing means. According to this, when the distribution means is set so as to distribute a lot of game balls to the disadvantageous side entry means, the distribution means is set so as to distribute a lot of game balls to the advantage side entry means Compared with, a player can enjoy many lotteries and many effects. In other words, the player can play a game comfortably even when the sorting means is set so as to distribute a large number of game balls to the disadvantageous side entry means. Therefore, according to the feature D1 of the present invention group, the player can comfortably play the game without reducing the degree of freedom of setting the distribution means, and the player's attention to the game is improved. Can do.

Feature D2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D1 of the present invention group,
The distribution means increases the ratio of distributing the game balls to the advantageous side entrance means and entering the balls, and decreases the ratio of distributing the game balls to the disadvantage side entrance means and entering the first. And the second state in which the ratio of the game balls to be distributed to the advantageous side entrance means is reduced and the ratio of the game balls to be input to the disadvantage side entrance means is increased. A gaming machine that is configured to be switchable and settable.

  According to the feature D2 of the present invention group, the allocating means switches between the first state and the second state to set and distribute the game balls to the advantageous side entry means, The ratio at which the game balls are distributed to the disadvantageous side entry means can be set. Therefore, according to the feature D2 of the present invention group, the configuration of the distributing means can be simplified.

Feature D3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D1 or feature D2 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine characterized in that the special distribution execution means is provided between the advantageous side entry means and the disadvantageous side entry means.

  According to the feature D3 of the present invention group, since the special distribution execution means is provided between the advantageous side entry means and the disadvantageous side entry means, the player can play the game on the disadvantageous side entry means. It becomes easier to focus on whether or not the game ball has entered the advantageous side entrance means and the special distribution execution means rather than whether or not the ball has entered. Therefore, according to the feature D3 of the present invention group, the player can comfortably play the game without reducing the degree of freedom of setting the distribution means, and the player's attention to the game is improved. Can do.

Feature D4.
In the gaming machine described in any of features D1 to D3 of the present invention group,
The special distribution execution means includes
By detecting the entry of the game ball to the player, the game side is shifted to a game state advantageous to the player (the winning lottery mode is shifted to the high probability mode),
By detecting the entry of the game ball to the self, the game state advantageous for the player is not shifted (the lottery mode does not shift to the high probability mode), the disadvantageous side entrance (the lower entrance 471c),
A guide member (guide member 471d) for guiding a game ball to the advantageous side entrance or the disadvantage side entrance;
A gaming machine comprising a guide member driving unit (guide member driving unit 471e) for driving the guide member.

  According to the feature D4 of the present invention group, the special distribution execution means drives the guide member by the guide member driving unit to guide the game ball to the advantageous side entrance or the disadvantage side entrance, thereby playing the game A special distribution for determining whether or not to shift to a game state advantageous to the player can be executed. Therefore, according to the feature D4 of the present invention group, the player pays attention to the whereabouts of the game ball, so that the player's attention to the game can be improved.

Feature D5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D4 of the present invention group,
Game ball counting means (non-winning counter NPC) for counting the game balls that have entered the disadvantageous side entry means,
The special allocating execution means is configured to provide the advantageous side when the number of the game balls entered into the disadvantageous side entry means counted in the predetermined period by the game ball counting means is larger than a predetermined number. A gaming machine, characterized in that a rate at which the game ball enters the entrance is larger than a rate at which the game ball enters the disadvantage side entrance.

  According to the feature D5 of the present invention group, the gaming machine includes game ball counting means for counting game balls that have entered the disadvantageous side entry means. Further, the special distribution execution means, when the number of game balls entered into the disadvantageous side entry means counted in a predetermined period by the game ball counting means is larger than the predetermined number, Is set so that the rate at which the game ball enters is larger than the rate at which the game ball enters the disadvantageous entrance. According to this, when the distribution means is set so as to distribute a lot of game balls to the disadvantageous side entry means, the distribution means is set so as to distribute a lot of game balls to the advantage side entry means Compared with the game machine, it becomes easier to shift to a game state advantageous to the player. Therefore, according to the feature D5 of the present invention group, the player can comfortably play the game without reducing the degree of freedom of setting the distribution means, and the player's attention to the game is improved. Can do.

Feature D6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature D4 of the present invention group,
The game ball counting means (winning counter PC and non-winning counter NPC) counts game balls that have entered the disadvantageous side entry means, and counts game balls that have entered the advantageous side entry means,
The special distribution execution means is configured to determine the number of game balls that have entered the disadvantage side entry means with respect to the number of game balls that have entered the advantage side entry means counted in a predetermined period by the game ball counting means. When the ratio of the number is higher than a predetermined ratio, the ratio of entering the game ball into the advantageous side entrance is larger than the ratio of entering the game ball into the disadvantage side entrance. A gaming machine characterized by setting.

  According to the feature D6 of the present invention group, the gaming machine has entered the disadvantageous side entry means for the number of game balls that have entered the advantage side entry means counted in the predetermined period by the game ball counting means. When the ratio of the number of game balls is higher than a predetermined ratio, the rate at which the game ball enters the advantage side entrance is larger than the rate at which the game ball enters the disadvantage side entrance. Set. According to this, when the distribution means is set so as to distribute a lot of game balls to the disadvantageous side entry means, the distribution means is set so as to distribute a lot of game balls to the advantage side entry means Compared with the game machine, it becomes easier to shift to a game state advantageous to the player. Therefore, according to the feature D6 of the present invention group, the player can comfortably play the game without reducing the degree of freedom of setting the distribution means, and the player's attention to the game is improved. Can do.

  According to such a feature group D of the present invention, the player's attention to the game can be improved, and the following problems can be solved.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine including a display device that variably displays a plurality of pictures is known. This gaming machine is provided with various winning ports such as operating ports provided in the game area. The gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a big hit lottery when a game ball enters the operation port, and starts displaying the variation of the pattern. The gaming machine executes payout of a predetermined number of prize balls when game balls enter into various winning ports. In addition, for example, when the big win lottery is won, the gaming machine finally stops and displays a specific combination of pictures on the display device and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

  However, internal lottery such as jackpot lottery is triggered only by game balls entering the operating gates, and the payout of prize balls is triggered only by game balls entering various winning ports. The person pays attention only to whether or not the game ball enters the various winning holes. Therefore, there is a problem that a player's attention to the game decreases.

<Feature E group>
Feature E1.
A launching means (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the game board, and a ball entering means (general winning opening 35D) provided in the game area for entering the game ball And a gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) comprising a payout device (payout device 71) for paying out a prize ball when a ball enters the ball entry means,
A holding means (holding device 48) for holding the game ball into the ball entering means;
A gaming machine comprising switching means (main control device 60) for switching whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding means can be released.

  According to the feature E1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is provided with a holding means for holding the game ball entering the ball entry means, so that the game ball flows down the game area and enters the ball entry means. When the ball is placed, it is temporarily held by the holding means. And since the gaming machine is provided with a switching means for switching whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding means can be released, the game balls flowing down the game area and entering the ball entering means are diversified. be able to. Therefore, according to the feature E1 of the present invention group, the player's attention to the game can be improved.

Feature E2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E1 of the present invention group,
A release device (push button 25b) for releasing the holding of the game ball by the holding means based on the operation of the player;
The switching means changes the release setting that defines whether or not the release of the game ball held by the hold means can be released by the release device to enable or disable the hold of the game ball by the hold means. A gaming machine characterized by switching whether or not it can be released.

  According to the feature E2 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is provided with a release device that releases the holding of the game ball by the holding means based on the operation of the player, so that the game ball is inserted at a timing intended by the player. The ball means can be entered. In addition, the switching means can release the hold of the game ball by the hold means by changing the release setting that defines whether the hold of the game ball by the hold means can be released by the release device to valid or invalid. Therefore, the gaming machine can freely set the timing at which the game ball can enter the entrance means regardless of the player's intention. Therefore, according to the feature E2 of the present invention group, the player's attention to the game can be improved.

Feature E3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E1 or feature E2 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the switching unit switches whether or not the holding of the gaming ball by the holding unit can be released based on a payout rate of the gaming ball.

  According to the feature E3 of the present invention group, the switching means switches whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding means can be released based on the game ball payout rate. Therefore, the player pays attention to the game ball payout rate, so that the player's degree of attention to the game can be further improved.

Feature E4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E3 of the present invention group,
The number of game balls fired toward the game area by the launching means (launch number counter OC), and the number of game balls awarded by the payout device (award ball number counter IC) ) And a payout rate calculating means (main control device 60) for calculating the payout rate of the game balls (the payout rate BA) by dividing the number of prize balls by the number of shots,
The switching means switches whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding means can be released based on the game ball payout ratio calculated by the game payout rate calculating means. Machine.

  According to the feature E4 of the present invention group, the switching unit switches whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding unit can be released based on the game ball output rate calculated by the game output rate calculating unit. Therefore, the player pays attention to the game ball payout rate, so that the player's degree of attention to the game can be further improved.

Feature E5.
In the gaming machine described in the feature E4 of the present invention group,
The switching means performs switching so that the holding of the game ball by the holding means can be canceled when the game ball payout rate calculated by the output rate calculating means is less than 1. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature E5 of the present invention group, the switching means is provided when the game ball output rate calculated by the game output rate calculation unit is less than 1, that is, when the player's possession ball decreases. Since the switching is performed so that the holding of the game ball by the holding means can be released, the player can increase the holding ball that has been reduced. Therefore, according to the feature E5 of the present invention group, the player's attention to the game can be further improved.

Feature E6.
In the gaming machine described in any of features E1 to E5 of the present invention group,
The holding unit is configured to be able to hold a plurality of the game balls, and when the holding of the game balls by the holding unit is released, all the game balls among the held game balls are moved forward. A gaming machine characterized in that a ball is entered into an entry ball means.

  According to the feature E6 of the present invention group, when the holding means releases the hold of the game ball by the hold means, all the game balls out of the pending game balls enter the entry means. A large amount of game balls can be paid out to the payout device. Therefore, according to the feature E6 of the present invention group, the player's attention to the game can be further improved.

Feature E7.
In the gaming machine described in any of features E1 to E5 of the present invention group,
The holding means is configured to be able to hold a plurality of the game balls, and when the holding of the game balls by the holding means is released, one of the game balls held is held. A gaming machine characterized by causing the ball entry means to enter the ball.

  According to the feature E7 of the present invention group, when the holding means releases the holding of the game ball by the holding means, one of the holding game balls is put into the entering means. The game ball can be paid out to the payout device in a plurality of times. Therefore, according to the feature E7 of the present invention, the player's attention to the game can be further improved.

Feature E8.
In the gaming machine described in any of features E1 to E7 of the present invention group,
Provided in a game area formed in the game board, and provided with operation ports (upper operation port 36 and lower operation port 37) for entering a game ball flowing down the game region,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the switching unit switches whether or not the holding of the gaming ball by the holding unit can be released based on a result of an internal lottery triggered by entering the operation port.

  According to the feature E8 of the present invention group, the switching means switches whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding means can be released based on the result of the internal lottery triggered by the ball entering the operation port. When the big hit lottery is won, the game ball can be switched so as to be released from the holding means, and the timing at which the game ball can enter the ball entering means can be diversified. Therefore, according to the feature E8 of the present invention group, the player's attention to the game can be further improved.

Feature E9.
In the gaming machine described in any of features E1 to E7 of the present invention group,
The result of the internal lottery triggered by the entrance to the operating port for entering the game ball that is provided in the game board of another game machine different from the game machine and that flows down the game area With other machine result acquisition means to acquire
The gaming machine is characterized by switching whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding unit can be released based on the result of the internal lottery acquired by the other machine result acquiring unit.

  According to the feature E9 of the present invention group, the switching means switches whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding means can be released based on the result of the internal lottery acquired by the other machine result acquiring means. When another game machine installed next to the player wins the jackpot lottery, it can be switched so that the hold of the game ball by the holding means can be released, and the game ball is put into the entering means The timing that can be diversified can be diversified. Therefore, according to the feature E9 of the present invention group, the player's attention to the game can be further improved.

  According to the feature group E of the present invention, the player's attention to the game can be improved, and the following problems can be solved.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine including a display device that variably displays a plurality of pictures is known. This gaming machine is provided with various winning ports such as a general winning port, an operating port, and a variable winning device provided in the gaming area, and a predetermined number of gaming balls can be obtained by entering gaming balls into the various winning ports. I am paying out. In addition, the gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when a game ball enters the operation port, and also starts displaying a variation of the pattern. For example, when the game machine wins the big hit lottery, the game machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific pictures on the display device and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

  However, when a game ball flows down the game area and enters various winning holes, it always enters the monotonous route, so that the player's attention to the game is reduced. There's a problem.

<Feature F group>
Feature F1.
A launching unit (launching handle 27) for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on the game board, and a plurality of ball entering means (general winning ports) provided in the game area for entering the game ball 35E, 35Z, grand prize winning port 38a, through gate 41, first out port 39a, and second out port 39b), and distributing means for distributing the game balls to any of the plurality of ball entering means. (Nails 44a, 44z) and a payout device (payout device 71) for paying out a winning ball when a ball is entered into the ball entry means (general winning ports 35E, 35Z and large winning port 38a). A gaming machine (pachinko machine 10) provided,
The plurality of ball entry means include
A first ball entry means (large winning opening 38a and through gate 41);
Second entrance means (first out port 39a and second out port 39b);
When the game ball is distributed to the second ball entry means by the distribution means, the ball distribution ball means (general winning opening 35E, 35Z) for entering the game ball,
The gaming machine includes a holding unit (holding device 49, 48Z) for holding the game ball into the sorting ball entering unit.
The allocating means is configured to be able to set a ratio for distributing the game balls to the first entrance means and entering a ratio for distributing the game balls to the second entrance means. A gaming machine characterized by being made.

  According to the feature F1 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is provided with a holding means for holding the game ball into the sorting and entering ball means, so that the gaming ball flows down the gaming area and enters the sorting. When entering the ball means, the ball is temporarily held by the holding means. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the paths of the game balls that flow down the game area and enter the sorting and entering ball means. In addition, since the distribution ball means causes the game ball to enter when the game ball is distributed to the second ball entry means by the distribution means, a large number of game balls are placed in the second ball entry means. When the distribution means is set so as to distribute, a larger number of game balls are held in the holding means than in the case where the distribution means is set so as to distribute many game balls to the first entrance means. be able to. Then, by releasing the holding of the game ball by the holding means, the player can increase the holding ball. Therefore, according to the feature F1 of the present invention group, the player's attention to the game can be improved.

Feature F2.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F1 of the present invention group,
The distribution means increases the ratio of distributing and entering the game balls to the first entrance means, and decreases the ratio of distributing and entering the game balls to the second entrance means. The ratio of the first state and the game ball being distributed to the first ball entry means to be reduced and the ratio of the game ball being distributed to the second ball entry means to be high are increased. A gaming machine configured to be switchable between a second state and a setting.

  According to the feature F2 of the present invention group, the distribution means assigns the game balls to the first entry means by switching between the first state and the second state and setting the ratio. And a ratio at which the game balls are distributed to the second entry means and entered. Therefore, according to the feature F2 of the present invention group, the configuration of the distributing means can be simplified.

Feature F3.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F1 or the feature F2 of the present invention group,
The first entry means gives an advantageous result to the player when the game ball enters, and the second entry means gives the advantageous result given by the first entry means. A gaming machine characterized in that a more disadvantageous result is given to a player when the game ball enters.

  According to the feature F3 of the present invention group, when the game balls are distributed to the second ball entering means by the sorting means, the game throwing-in ball means enters the game ball. When the distribution means is set so as to distribute a lot of game balls to the ball means, compared with the case where the distribution means is set so as to distribute a lot of game balls to the first entrance means, The game ball can be held by the holding means. Then, by releasing the holding of the game ball by the holding means, the player can increase the number of possessed balls. Therefore, the distribution means is set so as to distribute many game balls to the second ball entering means. Even in this case, the player can play the game comfortably. Therefore, according to the feature F3 of the present invention group, the player can comfortably play the game without reducing the degree of freedom of setting the distribution means, and the player's attention to the game is improved. Can do.

Feature F4.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F3 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the holding means is provided between the first entering means and the second entering means.

  According to the feature F4 of the present invention group, the holding means is provided between the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means, so that the player can play the game on the second ball entry means. It becomes easier to focus on whether or not a game ball has entered the first ball entry means and the holding means than whether or not a ball has entered. Therefore, according to the feature F4 of the present invention group, the player can comfortably play the game without reducing the degree of freedom of setting the distribution means, and the player's attention to the game is improved. Can do.

Feature F5.
In the gaming machine described in any of features F1 to F4 of the present invention group,
A gaming machine comprising switching means (main control device 60) for switching whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding means can be released.

  According to the feature F5 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is provided with switching means for switching whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding means can be released, so that the game area flows down and enters the sorting ball entering means. It is possible to diversify the paths of game balls to be sphered. Therefore, according to the feature F5 of the present invention group, the player's attention to the game can be improved.

Feature F6.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F5 of the present invention group,
A release device (push button 25b) for releasing the holding of the game ball by the holding means based on the operation of the player;
The switching means changes the release setting that defines whether or not the release of the game ball held by the hold means can be released by the release device to enable or disable the hold of the game ball by the hold means. A gaming machine characterized by switching whether or not it can be released.

  According to the feature F6 of the present invention group, the gaming machine is provided with a release device for releasing the holding of the game ball by the holding means based on the operation of the player, so that the game ball is inserted at a timing intended by the player. The ball means can be entered. Further, the switching means can release the hold of the game ball by the hold means by changing the release setting that defines whether the hold of the game ball by the hold means can be released by the release device to valid or invalid. Therefore, the gaming machine can freely set the timing at which the game ball can be entered into the sorting ball entry means regardless of the player's intention. Therefore, according to the feature F6 of the present invention group, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the game.

Feature F7.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F5 or the feature F6 of the present invention group,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the switching unit switches whether or not the holding of the gaming ball by the holding unit can be released based on a payout rate of the gaming ball.

  According to the feature F7 of the present invention group, the switching means switches whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding means can be released based on the game ball payout rate. Therefore, the player pays attention to the game ball payout rate, so that the player's degree of attention to the game can be further improved.

Feature F8.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F7 of the present invention group,
The number of game balls fired toward the game area by the launching means (launch number counter OC), and the number of game balls awarded by the payout device (award ball number counter IC) ) And a payout rate calculating means (main control device 60) for calculating the payout rate of the game balls (the payout rate BA) by dividing the number of prize balls by the number of shots,
The switching means switches whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding means can be released based on the game ball payout ratio calculated by the game payout rate calculating means. Machine.

  According to the feature F8 of the present invention group, the switching unit switches whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding unit can be released based on the game ball output rate calculated by the output rate calculating unit. Therefore, the player pays attention to the game ball payout rate, so that the player's degree of attention to the game can be further improved.

Feature F9.
In the gaming machine described in the feature F8 of the present invention group,
The switching means performs switching so that the holding of the game ball by the holding means can be canceled when the game ball payout rate calculated by the output rate calculating means is less than 1. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature F9 of the present invention group, the switching means is when the game ball output rate calculated by the game output rate calculation unit is less than 1, that is, when the player's possession ball is decreasing. Since the switching is performed so that the holding of the game ball by the holding means can be released, the player can increase the holding ball that has been reduced. Therefore, according to the feature F9 of the present invention group, the player's attention to the game can be further improved.

Feature F10.
In the gaming machine described in any of features F1 to F9 of the present invention group,
The holding means is configured to be able to hold a plurality of the game balls, and when the holding of the game balls by the holding means is released, all of the game balls among the held game balls are A gaming machine characterized in that it is made to enter a sorting and entering means.

  According to the feature F10 of the present invention group, when the holding means releases the holding of the game ball by the holding means, all the game balls out of the pending game balls are entered into the sorting and entering ball means. A large amount of game balls can be paid out to the payout device at a time. Therefore, according to the feature F10 of the present invention group, the player's attention to the game can be further improved.

Feature F11.
In the gaming machine described in any of features F1 to F9 of the present invention group,
The holding means is configured to be able to hold a plurality of the game balls, and when the holding of the game balls by the holding means is released, one of the game balls held is held. A gaming machine characterized in that the game is made to enter the sorting and entering means.

  According to the feature F11 of the present invention group, when the holding means cancels the holding of the game ball by the holding means, one of the holding game balls is put into the sorting and entering means. Therefore, the game ball can be paid out to the payout device in a plurality of times. Therefore, according to the feature F11 of the present invention, the player's attention to the game can be further improved.

Feature F12.
In the gaming machine described in any of features F5 to F11 of the present invention group,
Provided in a game area formed in the game board, and provided with operation ports (upper operation port 36 and lower operation port 37) for entering a game ball flowing down the game region,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the switching unit switches whether or not the holding of the gaming ball by the holding unit can be released based on a result of an internal lottery triggered by entering the operation port.

  According to the feature F12 of the present invention group, the switching means switches whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding means can be released based on the result of the internal lottery triggered by the ball entering the operation port. , When winning the big hit lottery, etc., it is possible to switch so that the holding of the game ball by the holding means can be released, and it is possible to diversify the timing at which the game ball can enter the sorting ball entering means . Therefore, according to the feature F12 of the present invention group, the player's attention to the game can be further improved.

Feature F13.
In the gaming machine described in any of features F5 to F11 of the present invention group,
The result of the internal lottery triggered by the entrance to the operating port for entering the game ball that is provided in the game board of another game machine different from the game machine and that flows down the game area With other machine result acquisition means to acquire
The gaming machine is characterized by switching whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding unit can be released based on the result of the internal lottery acquired by the other machine result acquiring unit.

  According to the feature F13 of the present invention group, the switching means switches whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding means can be released based on the result of the internal lottery acquired by the other machine result acquiring means. When another game machine installed next to the player wins the jackpot lottery, it can be switched so that the holding of the game ball by the holding means can be released, and the game ball is entered into the sorting ball entering means. It is possible to diversify the timing at which the ball can be made. Therefore, according to the feature F13 of the present invention group, the player's attention to the game can be further improved.

  According to the feature group F of the present invention as described above, the player's attention to the game can be improved, and the following problems can be solved.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine including a display device that variably displays a plurality of pictures is known. This gaming machine is provided with various winning ports such as a general winning port, an operating port, and a variable winning device provided in the gaming area, and a predetermined number of gaming balls can be obtained by entering gaming balls into the various winning ports. I am paying out. In addition, the gaming machine executes an internal lottery such as a jackpot lottery when a game ball enters the operation port, and also starts displaying a variation of the pattern. For example, when the game machine wins the big hit lottery, the game machine finally stops and displays a combination of specific pictures on the display device and shifts the gaming state to a specific control state advantageous to the player. In this specific control state, the gaming machine pays out a large amount of game balls, for example, by shifting the variable winning device to a state in which game balls can enter.

  However, when a game ball flows down the game area and enters various winning holes, it always enters the monotonous route, so that the player's attention to the game is reduced. There's a problem.

  As described above, the present invention can be suitably used for gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 25b ... Push button, 35, 35D, 35E, 35Z ... General winning opening, 36, 36B ... Upper operation opening, 36B1 ... Passage, 36B2 ... Passing part for winning, 36B3 ... Bottom opening / closing door, 36B4 ... Bottom Drive unit, 37 ... lower operation port, 38, 38C ... variable winning device, 38a ... large winning port, 38b, 38d ... open / close door, 38c, 38e ... variable winning drive unit, 39a ... first out port, 39b ... second Out port, 40 ... game ball holding mechanism, 44a ... nail, 47 ... game ball sorting mechanism, 48, 49, 48Z ... holding device, 51 ... design display device, 60 ... main control device, 62 ... MPU, 90 ... sound Light emission control device, 92 ... MPU, 100 ... Display control device, 401 ... Holding unit, 401a, 481a, 491a ... Upper plate, 401b, 481b, 491b ... Lower plate, 401c, 481c, 91c ... Plate drive unit, 402 ... Information giving unit, 471 ... Sorting unit, 481,491,481Z ... Reserving unit, 402b, 471b ... Upper entrance, 402c, 471c ... Lower entrance, 402d, 471d ... Guide Member: 402e, 471e: guide member driving unit, IC: winning ball counter, NPC: non-winning counter, OC: firing number counter, PC: winning counter.

Claims (1)

A launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area formed on a game board, a ball entry means provided in the game area for entering the game ball, and a ball entering the ball entry means A gaming machine comprising a payout device for paying out a prize ball when it occurs,
A holding means for holding the game ball into the ball entering means;
A gaming machine comprising switching means for switching whether or not the holding of the game ball by the holding means can be released.

Images